Pioneer Avic F940 Bt Operation Manual

Pioneer-Avic-F40-Bt-Operation-Manual-778469 pioneer-avic-f40-bt-operation-manual-778469

Pioneer-Avic-F840-Bt-Operation-Manual-778493 pioneer-avic-f840-bt-operation-manual-778493

AVIC F940 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-F940BT_UM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page1

AVIC F40 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-F40BT_UM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page1

AVIC F840 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-F840BT_UM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page1

2015-07-27

: Pioneer Pioneer-Avic-F940-Bt-Operation-Manual-778530 pioneer-avic-f940-bt-operation-manual-778530 pioneer pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 220 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

engb
- Table of Contents

Operation Manual

NAVIGATION AV SYSTEM

AVIC-F40BT

AVIC-F940BT

AVIC-F840BT

Be sure to read Important Information for the User

first!

Important Information for the User includes the

important information that you must understand before

using this navigation system.

English

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.

Please read through these instructions so you will know how to operate your model

properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, keep this document in a

safe place for future reference.

Important

The screens shown in the examples may differ

from actual screens.

Actual screens may be changed without notice

for performance and function improvements.

Introduction

Manual overview 9

–How to use this manual 9

–Conventions used in this manual 9

–Terms used in this manual 9

Notice regarding video viewing 10

Notice regarding DVD-Video viewing 10

Notice regarding MP3 file usage 10

iPod compatibility 10

Map coverage 11

Protecting the LCD panel and screen 11

Notes on internal memory 11

–Before removing the vehicle

battery 11

–Data subject to erasure 11

Basic operation

Checking part names and functions 12

Protecting your product from theft 14

–Removing the detachable

faceplate 14

–Attaching the detachable faceplate 14

Adjusting the LCD panel angle 15

Inserting and ejecting a disc 15

–Inserting a disc (for AVIC-F40BT) 15

–Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-F40BT) 16

–Inserting a disc (for AVIC-F940BT and

AVIC-F840BT) 16

–Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-F940BT and

AVIC-F840BT) 16

Inserting and ejecting an SD memory

card 16

–Inserting an SD memory card (for AVIC-

F40BT) 17

–Ejecting an SD memory card (for AVIC-

F40BT) 17

–Inserting an SD memory card (for AVIC-

F940BT and AVIC-F840BT) 18

–Ejecting an SD memory card (for AVIC-

F940BT and AVIC-F840BT) 18

Plugging and unplugging a USB storage

device 19

–Plugging in a USB storage device 20

–Unplugging a USB storage device 20

Connecting and disconnecting an iPod 20

–Connecting your iPod 20

–Disconnecting your iPod 20

Startup and termination 21

On first-time startup 21

Regular startup 21

–A message about the map

database 22

Demonstration images 22

How to use the navigation menu screens

Screen switching overview 24

What you can do on each menu 25

Shortcut Menu 25

–Selecting the shortcut 25

–Removing a shortcut 26

Operating list screens (e.g. POI list) 26

Operating the on-screen keyboard 26

How to use the map

How to read the map screen 27

–Enlarged map of the intersection 28

–Display during motorway driving 29

Types of the road stored in the map

database 29

Operating the map screen 29

–Changing the scale of the map 29

–Switching the map orientation 30

–Scrolling the map to the position you

want to see 30

Contents

Engb

–Viewing information about a specified

location 30

–Using shortcut menus on the map 31

Switching the view mode 32

Eco-friendly driving functions

Checking the eco-friendly driving status 33

Displaying Eco Drive Level guidance 34

Sudden start alert 34

Searching for and selecting a location

The basic flow of creating your route 35

Searching for a location by address 36

–Searching for a street name first 36

–Searching for a city name first 37

–Finding your destination by specifying

the postcode 38

–Searching by selected city history 39

Setting up a route to your home 39

Searching for Points of Interest (POI) 40

–Searching for POIs by preset

categories 40

–Searching for a POI directly from the

name of the facilities 40

–Searching for a nearby POI 41

–Searching for POIs around the

destination 41

–Searching for POIs around the city 41

Selecting destination from “Favourites”42

Searching for POIs by using the data on the

SD memory card 42

Selecting a location you searched for

recently 43

Searching for a location by coordinates 43

After the location is decided

Setting a route to your destination 44

–Displaying multiple routes 44

Checking and modifying the current

route

Displaying the route overview 45

Modifying the route calculation

conditions 45

–Items that users can operate 45

Checking the current itinerary 46

Editing waypoints 47

–Adding a waypoint 47

–Deleting a waypoint 47

–Sorting waypoints 48

Cancelling the route guidance 48

Registering and editing locations

Storing favourite locations 49

–Registering a location by

“Favourites”49

–Registering a location by scroll

mode 49

Editing registered locations 49

–Editing the favourite location in the

list 49

–Editing your home 50

–Sorting the favourite locations in the

list 50

–Deleting a favourite location from the

list 51

Exporting and importing favourite

locations 51

–Exporting favourite locations 51

–Importing favourite locations 51

Deleting the destination history from the

list 52

Using traffic information

Checking all traffic information 53

Checking traffic information on the

route 54

How to read traffic information on the

map 54

Setting an alternative route to avoid traffic

jams 55

–Checking for traffic jams

automatically 55

Engb 3

Contents

–Checking traffic information

manually 55

Selecting traffic information to display 56

Selecting preferred RDS-TMC service

provider manually 56

Registering and connecting a Bluetooth

device

Preparing communication devices 57

Registering your Bluetooth devices 57

–Searching for nearby Bluetooth

devices 57

–Pairing from your Bluetooth

devices 58

–Searching for a specified Bluetooth

device 59

–Deleting a registered device 60

Connecting a registered Bluetooth device

manually 60

–Setting for priority connecting 61

Using hands-free phoning

Displaying the phone menu 62

Making a phone call 62

–Direct dialling 62

–Making a call home easily 63

–Calling a number in the phone

book 63

–Dialling from the history 64

–Dialling a favourite location 64

–Dialling a facility’s phone number 64

–Dialling from the map 65

Receiving a phone call 65

–Answering an incoming call 65

Transferring the phone book 66

–Changing the order of names in the

phone book 67

–Deleting registered contacts 67

Changing the phone settings 67

–Editing the device name 67

–Editing the password 68

–Stopping Bluetooth wave

transmission 68

–Echo cancelling and noise

reduction 68

–Answering a call automatically 68

–Setting the automatic rejection

function 69

–Clearing memory 69

–Updating the Bluetooth wireless

technology software 70

Notes for hands-free phoning 70

Basic operations of the AV source

Displaying the AV operation screen 72

–Selecting a source 72

Operating list screens (e.g. iPod list

screen) 72

–Switching between the AV operation

screen and the list screen 72

–Selecting an item 73

–Returning to the previous display 73

Using the radio (FM)

Starting procedure 74

Reading the screen 74

Using the touch panel keys 75

–Storing and recalling broadcast

frequencies 76

–Using radio text 76

Operating by hardware buttons 77

Using advanced functions 77

–Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 77

–Tuning in strong signals 77

–Limiting stations to regional

programming 78

–Searching for an RDS station by PTY

information 78

–Receiving traffic announcements 78

–Tuning into alternative frequencies 79

–Using news programme

interruption 79

Contents

Engb

–Interruption icon status 79

–PTY list 81

Using the radio (AM)

Starting procedure 82

Reading the screen 82

Using the touch panel keys 83

–Storing and recalling broadcast

frequencies 83

Operating by hardware buttons 84

Using advanced functions 84

–Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 84

–Tuning in strong signals 84

Playing audio CDs

Starting procedure 86

Reading the screen 86

Using the touch panel keys 87

Operating by hardware buttons 88

Using advanced functions 88

Playing music files on ROM

Starting procedure 89

Reading the screen 89

Using the touch panel keys 91

Operating by hardware buttons 92

Using advanced functions 92

Playing a DVD-Video

Starting procedure 94

Reading the screen 94

Using the touch panel keys 95

–Resuming playback (Bookmark) 96

–Searching for a specific scene and

starting playback from a specified

time 97

–Direct number search 97

–Operating the DVD menu 97

–Using DVD menu by touch panel

keys 97

–Frame-by-frame playback 98

–Slow motion playback 98

Operating by hardware buttons 98

Using advanced functions 98

Playing a DivX video

Starting procedure 100

Reading the screen 100

Using the touch panel keys 101

–Frame-by-frame playback 102

–Slow motion playback 102

–Starting playback from a specified

time 103

Operating by hardware buttons 103

Using advanced functions 103

DVD-Video or DivX setup

Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup menu 104

Setting the top-priority languages 104

Setting the angle icon display 104

Setting the aspect ratio 105

Setting the parental lock 105

–Setting the code number and

level 105

Setting the auto play 106

Setting the subtitle file for DivX 106

Language code chart for DVDs 107

Playing music files (from USB or SD)

Starting procedure 108

Reading the screen 108

Using the touch panel keys (Music) 110

Operating by hardware buttons 111

Using advanced functions 111

Playing video files (from USB or SD)

Starting procedure 112

Reading the screen 112

Using the touch panel keys (Video) 113

–Searching for a specific scene and

starting playback from a specified

time 114

Operating by hardware buttons 114

Using advanced functions 114

Engb 5

Contents

Using an iPod (iPod)

Starting procedure 115

Reading the screen 115

Using the touch panel keys 117

Operating by hardware buttons 119

Starting the video playback 119

Narrowing down a song or video with the

list 119

Operating an application for iPhone from the

navigation system 120

–Starting procedure 121

–Using the touch panel keys 121

–Using the keyboard 122

–When using an application not

compatible with Advanced App

Mode 122

Operating the functions from your iPod 123

–Starting procedure 123

–Using the touch panel keys 123

Playing MusicSphere 124

–Starting procedure 124

–Reading the screen 124

–Using the touch panel keys 124

Using advanced functions 124

Using Aha Radio

Starting procedure 126

–For Android device users 126

–For iPhone users 127

Reading the screen 128

Using the touch panel keys 129

Functions coupled with Aha Radio and the

navigation system 130

–Displaying POIs obtained with Aha

Radio 130

Using the Bluetooth audio player

Starting procedure 131

Reading the screen 131

Using the touch panel keys 133

Operating by hardware buttons 133

Using advanced functions 134

Using AV input

Reading the screen 135

Using AV1 135

Using AV2 135

Using the touch panel keys 135

Customising preferences

Displaying the screen for navigation

settings 136

Checking the connections of leads 136

Checking sensor learning status and driving

status 137

–Clearing status 137

Using the fuel consumption function 138

–Inputting the fuel consumption

information for calculating the fuel

cost 138

–Calculating the fuel consumption 138

–Exporting the data of fuel cost

information 139

Recording your travel history 140

Using the demonstration guidance 140

Registering your home 141

Correcting the current location 141

Changing the eco-function setting 141

–Clearing the fuel consumption

information 142

Displaying the screen for map settings 142

Setting the auto-zoom display 143

Setting the detailed city map 143

Setting the barrier graphic for city map 143

Setting the speed limit display 144

Displaying the traffic notification icon 144

Displaying the Bluetooth connection

icon 144

Setting the current street name display 144

Setting the display of icons of favourite

locations 145

Displaying the 3D landmarks 145

Displaying manoeuvres 146

Displaying the fuel consumption

information 146

Contents

Engb

Displaying POI on the map 146

–Displaying preinstalled POIs on the

map 146

–Displaying the customised POIs 147

Changing the view mode 148

Setting the map colour change between day

and night 148

Changing the road colour 148

Changing the setting of navigation

interruption screen 148

Selecting the “Quick Access”menu 149

Displaying the screen for system

settings 149

–Customising the regional settings 150

–Setting the Volume for Guidance and

Phone 152

–Changing the preinstalled splash

screen 153

–Changing to the splash screen stored

in the SD memory card 153

–Setting for rear view camera 154

–Adjusting the response positions of the

touch panel (touch panel

calibration) 155

–Setting the illumination colour 155

–Checking the version information 156

–Reversing the climate control status

display 156

Selecting the video for rear display 156

Adjusting the picture 157

Displaying the screen for AV system

settings 158

–Setting video input 1 (AV1) 158

–Setting video input 2 (AV2) 159

–Changing the wide screen mode 159

–Setting the rear output 160

–Switching the preout setting 160

–Switching the muting/attenuation

timing 160

–Switching the muting/attenuation

level 161

–Switching Auto PI seek 161

–Setting the FM tuning step 161

–Displaying your DivX VOD registration

code 162

–Displaying your DivX VOD

deregistration code 162

–Selecting the smartphone connection

method 162

Displaying the screen for AV sound

settings 162

–Using balance adjustment 163

–Using the equaliser 163

–Adjusting the equaliser curve

automatically (Auto EQ) 165

–Using sonic centre control 168

–Adjusting loudness 168

–Using subwoofer output 168

–Using the high pass filter 168

–Adjusting source levels 169

–Enhancing bass (Bass Booster) 169

Replicating the settings 169

Setting the safe mode 170

Turning off the screen 170

Displaying the operation status of

vehicle equipment

Displaying obstacle detection

information 171

Displaying the operating status of the climate

control panel 171

Operating your navigation system with

voice

To ensure safe driving 173

Basics of the voice operation 173

–Flow of the voice operation 173

–Starting the voice operation 173

–How to use the voice operation 174

Available basic voice commands 175

–Basic commands 175

–Voice operation for AV source 175

Engb 7

Contents

–Voice commands related to hands-free

phoning 176

Tips for the voice operation 176

Other functions

Setting the anti-theft function 177

–Setting the password 177

–Entering the password 177

–Deleting the password 177

–Forgotten password 177

Returning the navigation system to the

default or factory settings 178

–Restoring the default setting 178

–Returning the navigation system to the

initial state 178

–Setting items to be deleted 179

Appendix

Troubleshooting 181

Messages for navigation functions 186

Messages for audio functions 188

Positioning technology 190

–Positioning by GPS 190

–Positioning by dead reckoning 190

–How do GPS and dead reckoning work

together? 190

Handling large errors 191

–When positioning by GPS is

impossible 191

–Conditions likely to cause noticeable

positioning errors 192

Route setting information 194

–Route search specifications 194

Handling and care of discs 194

–Built-in drive and care 195

–Ambient conditions for playing a

disc 195

Playable discs 195

–DVD-Video and CD 195

–AVCHD recorded discs 196

–Playing DualDisc 196

–Dolby Digital 196

Detailed information for playable media 196

–Compatibility 196

–Media compatibility chart 199

Bluetooth 203

SD and SDHC logo 203

WMA/WMV 204

DivX 204

AAC 204

Android™204

Detailed information regarding connected

iPod devices 204

–iPod and iPhone 204

–iTunes 205

Using app-based connected content 205

–Aha Radio 205

Using the LCD screen correctly 206

–Handling the LCD screen 206

–Liquid crystal display (LCD)

screen 206

–Maintaining the LCD screen 206

–LED (light-emitting diode)

backlight 206

Display information 207

–Destination Menu 207

–Phone Menu 207

–Settings Menu 208

–Navi Settings menu 208

–System Settings menu 209

–Map Settings menu 209

–Bluetooth Settings menu 210

–AV System Settings menu 210

–AV Sound Settings menu 211

Glossary 212

Specifications 215

Contents

Engb

Manual overview

Before using this product, be sure to read Im-

portant Information for the User (a separate

manual) which contains warnings, cautions,

and other important information that you

should note.

The screen examples shown in this manual

are the ones for AVIC-F40BT. If you use a differ-

ent model, the screens that appear may differ

from the examples in the manual.

How to use this manual

Finding the operation procedure for

what you want to do

When you have decided what you want to do,

you can find the page you need from the Con-

tents.

Finding the operation procedure from

a menu name

If you want to check the meaning of an item

displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-

cessary page from the Display information at

the end of the manual.

Glossary

Use the glossary to find the meanings of

terms.

Conventions used in this manual

Before moving on, take a few minutes to read

the following information about the conven-

tions used in this manual. Familiarity with

these conventions will help you greatly as you

learn how to use your new equipment.

!Buttons on your navigation system are de-

scribed in ALL CAPITAL,BOLD lettering:

e.g.)

HOME button, MODE button.

!Menu items, screen titles, and functional

components are described in bold with

double quotation marks “”:

e.g.)

“Destination Menu”screen or “AV

Source”screen

!Touch panel keys that are available on the

screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:

e.g.)

[Destination], [Settings].

!Extra information, alternatives and other

notes are presented in the following for-

mat:

e.g.)

pIf the home location has not been stored

yet, set the location first.

!Functions of other keys on the same screen

are indicated with #at the beginning of the

description:

e.g.)

#If you touch [OK], the entry is deleted.

!References are indicated like this:

e.g.)

=For details of the operations, refer to

Screen switching overview on page 24.

Terms used in this manual

“Front display”and “Rear display”

In this manual, the screen that is attached to

the body of this navigation unit will be referred

to as the “Front display”. Any additional screen

that is commercially available and can be con-

nected to this navigation unit will be referred

to as the “Rear display”.

“Video image”

“Video image”in this manual indicates mov-

ing images of DVD-Video, DivX®, iPod, and any

equipment that is connected to this system

with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose

AV equipment.

Engb 9

Chapter

Introduction

“External storage device (USB, SD)”

The SD memory card, SDHC memory card,

microSD card, microSDHC card and USB

memory device are collectively referred to as

the “external storage device (USB, SD)”. If it in-

dicates the USB memory only, it is referred to

as the “USB storage device”.

“SD memory card”

The SD memory card, SDHC memory card,

microSD card and microSDHC card are col-

lectively referred to as the “SD memory

card”.

Notice regarding video

viewing

Remember that use of this system for com-

mercial or public viewing purposes may con-

stitute an infringement on the author’s rights

as protected by the Copyright Law.

Notice regarding DVD-

Video viewing

This item incorporates copy protection tech-

nology that is protected by U.S. patents and

other intellectual property rights of Rovi

Corporation. Reverse engineering and disas-

sembly are prohibited.

Notice regarding MP3 file

usage

Supply of this navigation system conveys only

a licence for private, non-commercial use and

does not convey a licence nor imply any right

to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-

enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-

restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other

media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,

intranets and/or other networks or in other

electronic content distribution systems, such

as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-

tions. An independent licence for such use is

required. For details, please visit

http://www.mp3licensing.com.

iPod compatibility

This product supports only the following iPod

models and iPod software versions. Others

may not work correctly.

!iPod touch (4th generation): iOS 5.0

!iPod touch (3rd generation): iOS 5.0

!iPod touch (2nd generation): iOS 4.2.1

!iPod touch (1st generation): iOS 3.1.3

!iPod classic 120GB: Ver. 2.0.1

!iPod classic 160GB (2009): Ver. 2.0.4

!iPod classic 80GB: Ver. 1.1.2

!iPod classic 160GB (2007): Ver. 1.1.2

!iPod nano (6th generation): Ver. 1.1

!iPod nano (5th generation): Ver. 1.0.2

!iPod nano (4th generation): Ver. 1.0.4

!iPod nano (3rd generation): Ver. 1.1.3

!iPhone 4S: iOS 5.0

!iPhone 4: iOS 5.0

!iPhone 3GS: iOS 5.0

!iPhone 3G: iOS 4.2.1

!iPhone: iOS 3.1.3

pIn this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-

ferred to as iPod.

pWhen you use this navigation system with

a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-

IU51V) (sold separately), you can control an

iPod compatible with this navigation sys-

tem.

pOperation methods may vary depending on

the iPod models and the software version

of iPod.

pDepending on the software version of the

iPod, it may not be compatible with this

equipment.

For details about iPod compatibility with

this navigation system, refer to the informa-

tion on our website.

Engb

Chapter

01 Introduction

Map coverage

For details about the map coverage of this na-

vigation system, refer to the information on

our website.

Protecting the LCD panel

and screen

pDo not allow direct sunlight to fall on the

LCD screen when this product is not being

used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight

can result in LCD screen malfunction due

to the resulting high temperatures.

pWhen using a mobile phone, keep the aer-

ial of the mobile phone away from the LCD

screen to prevent disruption of the video in

the form of spots, coloured stripes, etc.

pTo protect the LCD screen from damage, be

sure to touch the touch panel keys with

your finger only and gently touch the

screen.

Notes on internal memory

Before removing the vehicle

battery

If the battery is disconnected or discharged,

the memory will be erased and must be repro-

grammed.

pSome data remains. Be sure to read Setting

items to be deleted first.

=For details, refer to Setting items to be

deleted on page 179.

Data subject to erasure

The information is erased by disconnecting

the yellow lead from the battery (or removing

the battery itself).

pSome data remains. Be sure to read Setting

items to be deleted first.

=For details, refer to Setting items to be

deleted on page 179.

Engb 11

Chapter

Introduction

Checking part names and functions

This chapter gives information about the names of the parts and the main features using the buttons.

AVIC-F40BT (with the LCD panel closed)

7654321

AVIC-F40BT (with the LCD panel open)

Engb

Chapter

02 Basic operation

AVIC-F940BT,AVIC-F840BT

6 8

1button

!Press the button to activate voice op-

erations.

=For details, refer to Chapter 29.

!Press and hold the button to switch

the AV source to mute.

To cancel the muting, press and hold it

again.

2VOL (+/–) button

Press to adjust the AV (Audio and Video)

source volume.

3HOME button

!Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

!Press to switch between the Classic

Menu and the Shortcut Menu while the

“Top Menu”is displayed.

=For details, refer to What you can do

on each menu on page 25.

!Press and hold to turn off the screen dis-

play.

4MODE button

!Press to switch between the map screen

and the AV operation screen.

!Press to display the map screen while

the navigation function screen is dis-

played.

!Press and hold to display the “Picture

Adjustment”screen.

=For details, refer to Adjusting the pic-

ture on page 157.

5TRK button

Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast

forward, reverse and track search controls.

6hbutton

7LCD screen

8Disc-loading slot

Insert a disc to play.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting

a disc on page 15.

9SD card slot

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting

an SD memory card on page 16.

aMulti-control (Volume knob/ /MUTE)

!Rotate to adjust the AV (Audio and

Video) source volume.

Engb 13

Chapter

Basic operation

!Press the centre of Multi-control to hear

the route guidance.

!Press and hold the centre of Multi-con-

trol to mute the AV (Audio and Video)

source. To cancel the muting, press and

hold it again.

bDetachable faceplate

cbutton

Press to remove the detachable faceplate

from the navigation system.

=For details, refer to Removing the detach-

able faceplate on this page.

Protecting your product

from theft

pThis function is available for AVIC-F940BT

and AVIC-F840BT.

The detachable faceplate can be detached

from the navigation system to discourage

theft, as described below.

CAUTION

!Do not expose the detachable faceplate to ex-

cessive shock or disassemble it.

!Never grip the buttons tightly or use force

when removing or attaching.

!Keep the detachable faceplate out of reach of

small children to prevent them from putting it

in their mouths.

!After removing the detachable faceplate, keep

it in a safe place so it is not scratched or da-

maged.

!Keep the detachable faceplate out of direct

sunlight and high temperatures.

!When removing or attaching the detachable

faceplate, do so after turning the ignition

switch off (ACC OFF).

Removing the detachable

faceplate

pThe navigation system cannot be operated

while the detachable faceplate is removed

from the navigation system.

1 Press and hold the button, and slide

it down.

When you release your finger, the bottom of

the detachable faceplate separates slightly

from the navigation system.

2 Gently grip the bottom of the detach-

able faceplate and slowly pull it outward.

Detachable faceplate

Attaching the detachable faceplate

1 Slide the detachable faceplate all the

way into the navigation system.

Make sure the detachable faceplate is se-

curely connected to the mounting hooks of

the navigation system.

Engb

Chapter

02 Basic operation

2 Push the lower part of the detachable

faceplate until you hear a click.

If you fail to successfully attach the detach-

able faceplate to the navigation system, try

again but be careful not to force it as the

panel could be damaged.

Adjusting the LCD panel angle

pThis function is available for AVIC-F40BT

only.

WARNING

Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when

opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be

especially cautious of children’s hands and fin-

gers.

CAUTION

Do not open or close the LCD panel by force. This

may cause malfunction.

1 Press the hbutton.

The “Monitor Setup”screen appears.

2 Touch or to adjust the angle.

3 Touch .

pThe adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be

memorised and the LCD panel will automa-

tically return to that angle the next time the

LCD panel is opened or closed.

Inserting and ejecting a disc

Inserting a disc (for AVIC-F40BT)

WARNING

!Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when

opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel.

Be especially cautious of children’s hands

and fingers.

!Do not use with the LCD panel left open. If

LCD panel is left open, it may result in injury

in the event of an accident.

CAUTION

!Do not open or close the LCD panel by force.

This may cause malfunction.

!Do not operate this navigation system until

the LCD panel completely opens or closes. If

this navigation system is operated while the

LCD panel is opening or closing, the LCD

panel may stop at that angle for safety.

!Do not place a glass or a can on the open

LCD panel. Doing so may break this naviga-

tion system.

!Do not insert anything other than a disc into

the disc-loading slot.

1 Press the hbutton.

The “Monitor Setup”screen appears.

2 Touch [Open].

The LCD panel opens, and the disc-loading

slot appears.

Engb 15

Chapter

Basic operation

3 Insert a disc into the disc-loading slot.

The disc is loaded, and the LCD panel closes.

Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-F40BT)

1 Press the hbutton.

The “Monitor Setup”screen appears.

2 Touch [Disc Eject].

The LCD panel opens, and the disc is ejected.

3 Remove the disc, and press the hbut-

ton.

The LCD panel closes.

Inserting a disc (for AVIC-

F940BT and AVIC-F840BT)

CAUTION

Do not insert anything other than a disc into the

disc-loading slot.

%Insert a disc into the disc-loading slot.

Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-F940BT

and AVIC-F840BT)

1 Press the hbutton.

The touch panel keys for ejecting the media

appear.

2 Touch [Disc Eject].

The disc is ejected.

Inserting and ejecting an

SD memory card

CAUTION

!Ejecting an SD memory card during data

transfer can damage the SD memory card. Be

sure to eject the SD memory card by the pro-

cedure described in this manual.

!If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-

rage device for any reason, it is usually not

possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts

no liability for damages, costs or expenses

arising from data loss or corruption.

!Do not insert anything other than SD memory

cards.

Engb

Chapter

02 Basic operation

pThis system is not compatible with Multi

Media Card (MMC).

pCompatibility with all SD memory cards is

not guaranteed.

pThis unit may not achieve optimum perfor-

mance with some SD memory cards.

Inserting an SD memory card

(for AVIC-F40BT)

CAUTION

!Do not press the hbutton when an SD mem-

ory card is not fully inserted. Doing so may da-

mage the card.

!Do not press the hbutton before an SD mem-

ory card has been completely removed. Doing

so may damage the card.

1 Press the hbutton.

The “Monitor Setup”screen appears.

2 Touch [SD Insert].

The LCD panel opens, and the SD card slot ap-

pears.

3 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

Insert it with the label surface facing to the up-

side and press the card until it clicks and com-

pletely locks.

4 Press the hbutton.

The LCD panel closes.

pIf data related to map data, such as custo-

mised POI data, is stored on the SD mem-

ory card, the navigation system restarts.

Ejecting an SD memory card

(for AVIC-F40BT)

1 Press the hbutton.

The “Monitor Setup”screen appears.

2 Touch [Eject SD].

The LCD panel opens.

3 Press the middle of the SD memory

card gently until it clicks.

Engb 17

Chapter

Basic operation

4 Pull the SD memory card out straight.

5 Press the hbutton.

The LCD panel closes.

pWhen you eject the SD memory card by

touching [Eject SD], the model information

that you are using will be automatically

stored into the SD memory card.

The utility programme NavGate FEEDS will

use this information to recognise the model

that you use.

When the data related to map data is

stored

pThis description is for AVIC-F40BT.

If data related to map data, such as custo-

mised POI data, is stored on the SD memory

card, operating procedures are slightly differ-

ent.

1 Press the hbutton and then touch

[Eject SD].

2 Touch [Yes].

The navigation system restarts, and then the

LCD panel opens.

3 Eject the SD memory card.

4 Press the hbutton.

The LCD panel closes.

Inserting an SD memory card (for

AVIC-F940BT and AVIC-F840BT)

%Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

Insert the SD memory card with the terminal

contacts facing down, and press the card until

it clicks and locks completely.

pIf data related to map data, such as custo-

mised POI data, is stored on the SD mem-

ory card, the navigation system restarts.

Ejecting an SD memory card (for

AVIC-F940BT and AVIC-F840BT)

1 Press the hbutton.

The touch panel keys for ejecting the media

appear.

2 Touch [Eject SD].

A message prompting you to remove the SD

memory card appears.

Engb

Chapter

02 Basic operation

3 Press the middle of the SD memory

card gently until it clicks.

4 Pull the SD memory card out straight.

When the data related to map data is

stored

pThis description is for AVIC-F940BT and

AVIC-F840BT.

If data related to map data, such as custo-

mised POI data, is stored on the SD memory

card, operating procedures are slightly differ-

ent.

1 Press the hbutton and then touch

[Eject SD].

2 Touch [Yes].

The navigation system restarts, and a message

prompting you to remove the SD memory card

appears.

3 Eject the SD memory card while the

message is displayed.

Eject the SD memory card before touching

[OK].

4 Touch [OK].

The navigation system restarts.

Plugging and unplugging a

USB storage device

CAUTION

!To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-

rage device, never remove it from this naviga-

tion system while data is being transferred.

!Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility with

all USB mass storage devices and assumes

no responsibility for any loss of data on media

players, smart phones, or other devices while

using this product.

pThis navigation system may not achieve op-

timum performance with some USB sto-

rage devices.

pConnection via a USB hub is not possible.

Engb 19

Chapter

Basic operation

Plugging in a USB storage device

%Plug a USB storage device into the USB

and mini-jack connector.

USB and mini-jack connector

USB storage device

Unplugging a USB storage device

%Pull out the USB storage device after

checking that no data is being accessed.

Connecting and

disconnecting an iPod

CAUTION

!To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-

rage device, never remove it from this naviga-

tion system while data is being transferred.

!Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility with

all USB mass storage devices and assumes

no responsibility for any loss of data on media

players, smart phones, or other devices while

using this product.

Connecting your iPod

Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-

ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-

tion system.

pA USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU51V)

(sold separately) is required for connection.

pFor details about iPod compatibility with

this navigation system, refer to the informa-

tion on our website.

pConnection via a USB hub is not possible.

1 Check that no USB storage device is

connected.

2 Connect your iPod.

USB and mini-jack con-

nector

USB interface cable for

iPod

Disconnecting your iPod

%Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod

after checking that no data is being ac-

cessed.

Engb

Chapter

02 Basic operation

Startup and termination

1 Start the engine to boot up the system.

After a short pause, the splash screen comes

on for a few seconds.

pTo protect the LCD screen from damage, be

sure to touch the touch panel keys with

your finger only and gently touch the

screen.

2 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-

nate the system.

The navigation system is also turned off.

On first-time startup

When you use the navigation system for the

first time, select the language that you want to

use.

1 Start the engine to boot up the system.

After a short pause, the splash screen comes

on for a few seconds.

2 Touch the language that you want to

use on the screen.

3 Touch the language that you want to

use for the voice guidance.

The navigation system will now restart.

4 Read the disclaimer carefully, checking

its details, and then touch [OK] if you

agree to the conditions.

The map screen appears.

Regular startup

%Start the engine to boot up the system.

After a short pause, the splash screen comes

on for a few seconds.

pThe screen shown will differ depending on

the previous conditions.

pWhen there is no route, the disclaimer ap-

pears after the navigation system reboots.

Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its

details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to

the conditions.

pIf the anti-theft function is activated, you

must enter your password.

Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its

details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to

the conditions.

Engb 21

Chapter

Basic operation

A message about the map

database

After you start using this navigation system, a

message related to map data may be dis-

played.

pThis message is displayed the first time you

turn on the navigation system each month.

pTouch the message to close it or it will dis-

appear automatically after eight sec-

onds.

Demonstration images

If you do not operate this navigation system

for two minutes, demonstration images are

displayed.

pThe demonstration images will not be dis-

played if you drive after mounting this navi-

gation system.

Engb

Chapter

02 Basic operation

Engb 23

Chapter

Basic operation

Screen switching overview

Engb

Chapter

03 How to use the navigation menu screens

What you can do on each

1Top Menu

Press the HOME button to display the “Top

Menu”screen.

This is the starting menu to access the desired

screens and operate the various functions.

There are two types of the “Top Menu”screen.

Classic Menu

Shortcut Menu

pIn this manual, Classic Menu will be re-

ferred to as “Top Menu”.

2Destination Menu

You can search for your destination on this

menu. You can also check or cancel your set

route from this menu.

3Phone Menu

You can access the screen that is related to

hands-free phoning.

4AV operation screen

This is the screen that normally appears when

you play the AV source.

5Settings Menu

You can access the screen to customise set-

tings.

6Map screen

You can use this screen to check the current

vehicle position information and route to the

destination.

Shortcut Menu

Registering your favourite menu items in

shortcuts allows you to quickly jump to the re-

gistered menu screen by a simple touch on

the Shortcut Menu screen.

Selecting the shortcut

pUp to 15 menu items can be registered in

shortcuts.

1 Press the HOME button repeatedly to

display the Shortcut Menu screen.

pWhen you use the navigation system for the

first time or no items are set on shortcut, a

message will appear. Touch [Yes] to pro-

ceed to next step.

2 Touch [Shortcut].

The Shortcut selection screen appears.

3 Touch the tab on the right edge or scroll

the bar to display the icon that you want

to set to shortcut.

Scroll bar

4 Touch and hold the icon that you want

to add to shortcut.

Engb 25

Chapter

How to use the navigation menu screens

5 Move the icon to the left side of the

screen, and then release it.

The selected item is added to shortcut.

Removing a shortcut

1 Touch and hold the icon of the shortcut

you want to remove.

2 Move the icon to the right side of the

screen, and then release it.

Operating list screens (e.g.

POI list)

1Screen title

Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls

through the list and allows you to view the re-

maining items.

The previous screen returns.

4Listed items

Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-

row down the options and proceed to the next

operation.

5Number of possible choices

pIf there are 10 000 or more possible

choices, “****”is displayed.

If all of the characters cannot be displayed

within the displayed area, touching the key to

the right of the item allows you to see remain-

ing characters.

Operating the on-screen

keyboard

5 76

1Screen title

The screen title appears.

2Text box

Displays the characters that are entered. If

there is no text in the box, an informative

guide with text appears.

3Keyboard

Touch the keys to enter the characters.

The previous screen returns.

5Keys

Switches the on-screen keyboard layout.

6Sym.,Others,0-9

You can enter other characters of alphabet.

You can also enter text with marks such as [&]

or [+] or numbers.

Touch to toggle the selection.

pEven if you use any of “A”,“Ä”,“Å”,“Æ”,

the displayed result is the same.

7OK

Confirms the entry and allows you to proceed

to the next step.

Deletes the input text one letter at a time, be-

ginning at the end of the text. Continuing to

touch the key deletes all of the text.

Engb

Chapter

03 How to use the navigation menu screens

Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-

come familiar with how information appears on the map.

How to read the map screen

This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.

89 a

pInformation with an asterisk (*) appears

only when the route is set.

pDepending on the conditions and settings,

some items may not be displayed.

1Name of the street to be used (or next gui-

dance point)*

2Next direction of travel*

As you get closer to the guidance point, the

colour of the item changes to green.

pTouching this item enables you to hear

the next guidance again.

pYou can select between display and

non-display.

=For details, refer to Displaying man-

oeuvres on page 146.

3Distance to the guidance point*

Shows the distance to the next guidance

point.

pTouching this item enables you to hear

the next guidance again.

4Second manoeuvre arrow*

Shows the turning direction after next gui-

dance point and the distance to there.

=For details, refer to Displaying man-

oeuvres on page 146.

5Map control

Touching displays touch panel keys for

changing the map scale and the map orienta-

tion.

6Current position

Indicates the current location of your vehicle.

The apex of the triangular mark indicates your

orientation and the display moves automati-

cally as you drive.

pThe apex of the triangular mark is the

proper current position of the vehicle.

7Eco-Meter

Displays a graph comparing the past average

fuel mileage and the average fuel mileage

since the navigation system was last started.

=For details, refer to Displaying the fuel

consumption information on page 146.

Engb 27

Chapter

How to use the map

8Street name (or city name) that your vehi-

cle is travelling along

=For details, refer to Setting the current

street name display on page 144.

9Extension tab for the AV information bar

Touching this tab opens the AV information

bar and enables you to briefly view the current

status on the AV source. Touching it again re-

tracts the bar.

aShortcut to the AV operation screen

The AV source currently selected is shown.

Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-

tion screen of the current source directly.

pDepending on the source currently cho-

sen, an image is displayed.

bQuick Access icon

Displays the “Quick Access”menu.

=For details, refer to Using shortcut

menus on the map on page 31.

cMap orientation indicator

!When “North up”is selected, is dis-

played.

!When “Heading up”is selected, is

displayed.

pThe red arrow indicates north.

=For details, refer to Switching the map or-

ientation on page 30.

dCurrent route*

The route currently set is highlighted in colour

on the map. If a waypoint is set on the route,

the route after the next waypoint is high-

lighted in another colour.

eDirection line*

The direction towards your destination (next

waypoint, or the position of a cursor) is indi-

cated with a straight line.

fMulti-Info window

Each touch of Multi-Info window changes the

display information as follows.

!Distance to the destination (or dis-

tance to waypoint)*

!Estimated time of arrival at your des-

tination or waypoint*

The estimated time of arrival is an ideal

value calculated based on the value set

for “Average Speed”and the actual

driving speed. The estimated time of ar-

rival is only a reference value, and does

not guarantee arrival at that time.

!Travel time to your destination or

waypoint*

gCurrent time

Meaning of guidance flags

Destination

The checkered flag indicates your

destination.

Waypoint

The blue flags indicate your way-

points.

Guidance point

The next guidance point (next turn-

ing point, etc.) is shown by a yel-

low flag.

Enlarged map of the intersection

When “Close Up View”in the “Map Settings”

screen is “On”, an enlarged map of the inter-

section appears.

=For details, refer to Setting the auto-zoom

display on page 143.

Engb

Chapter

04 How to use the map

Display during motorway driving

In certain locations of the motorway, lane in-

formation is available. The map indicates the

recommended lane to be in to easily man-

oeuvre the next guidance.

While driving on the motorway, motorway exit

numbers and motorway signs may be dis-

played in the vicinity of interchanges and

exits.

2 3

1Lane information

2Motorway exit information

Displays the motorway exit.

3Motorway signs

These show the road number and give direc-

tional information.

pIf the data for these items is not contained

in the built-in memory, the information is

not available even if there are the signs on

the actual road.

Types of the road stored in

the map database

Roads included in the route guidance

Turn by turn routable roads contain full attri-

bute data and can be used for full route gui-

dance. Pioneer navigation will display full

route guidance, including turn-by-turn voice

directions and arrow icons.

Roads without turn-by-turn

instructions

Routable roads (the route displayed and high-

lighted in violet) have only basic data and can

only be used to plot a navigable route. Pioneer

Navigation will only display a navigable route

on the map (only the arrival guidance for the

destination or a waypoint is available). Please

review and obey all local traffic rules along the

highlighted route for your safety.

No turn-by-turn directions will be displayed on

these roads.

Non routable roads (pink colour road)

Map display is possible, but it cannot be used

for route calculation. Please review and obey

all local traffic rules along this route. (For your

safety.)

Operating the map screen

Changing the scale of the map

You can change the map scale between 25

metres and 2 000 kilometres (25 yards and

1 000 miles).

1 Display the map screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch on the map screen.

and with the map scale appear.

3 Touch or to change the map

scale.

pIf you do not operate the function for a few

seconds, the touch panel keys for map dis-

play control disappear.

Engb 29

Chapter

How to use the map

#If you touch the direct scale key, the map is

changed to the selected scale directly.

Switching the map orientation

You can switch how the map shows your vehi-

cle’s direction between “Heading up”and

“North up”.

!Heading up:

The map display always shows the vehicle’s

direction as proceeding toward the top of

the screen.

!North up:

The map display always has north at the

top of the screen.

pThe map orientation is fixed at “North up”

when the map scale is 50 kilometres (25

miles) or more.

pThe map orientation is fixed at “Heading

up”when the 3D map screen is displayed.

1 Display the map screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch on the map screen.

or appears.

3 Touch or to switch the vehicle’s

direction.

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

pIf you do not operate the function for a few

seconds, the touch panel keys for map dis-

play control disappear.

Scrolling the map to the

position you want to see

1 Display the map screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch and drag the map in the desired

direction to scroll.

1Cursor

2Distance from the current position

Positioning the cursor to the desired location

results displaying in a brief informational over-

view about the location at the bottom of

screen, with the street name and other infor-

mation for this location. (The information

shown varies depending on the position.)

pThe scrolling increment depends on your

dragging length.

#If you touch , the map returns to the cur-

rent position.

pPressing MODE button returns the map to

the current position.

Viewing information about a

specified location

An icon appears at registered places (home lo-

cation, specific places, Favourites entries)

and places where there is a POI icon or traffic

information icon. Place the scroll cursor over

the icon to view detailed information.

1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-

sor to the icon you want to view.

2 Touch .

The “Information List”screen appears.

Engb

Chapter

04 How to use the map

3 Touch the item that you want to check

the detailed information.

Information for a specified location appears.

The information shown varies according to the

location. (There may be no information for that

location.)

=For details, refer to Setting the display of

icons of favourite locations on page 145.

=For details, refer to Displaying POI on the

map on page 146.

=For details, refer to How to read traffic infor-

mation on the map on page 54.

pTouching [Call] enables you to call the posi-

tion if a telephone number is available.

(Pairing with mobile phone featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology is required.)

=For details, refer to Dialling from the map

on page 65.

Using shortcut menus on the map

“Quick Access”menu allows you to perform

various tasks, such as route calculation for the

location indicated by the cursor or registering

a location in “Favourites”, faster than using

the navigation menu.

You can customise “Quick Access”displayed

on screen. The “Quick Access”described here

are prepared as the default setting.

=For details, refer to Selecting the “Quick Ac-

cess”menu on page 149.

pItems marked with an asterisk (*) cannot

be removed from the “Quick Access”

menu.

%When the map is displayed, touch .

Quick Access menu

:Route Options*

Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This

item can be selected only during route gui-

dance.

You can modify the conditions for route calcu-

lation and recalculate the current route.

=For details, refer to Modifying the route cal-

culation conditions on page 45.

:Destination*

Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the

route to the place specified with the cursor.

:Registration

by the cursor to “Favourites”.

=For details, refer to Registering a location by

scroll mode on page 49.

:Vicinity Search

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of

the cursor.

=For details, refer to Searching for a nearby

POI on page 41.

:Overlay POI

Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)

on the map.

=For details, refer to Displaying POI on the

map on page 146.

:Volume

Displays the “Volume Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the Volume for

Guidance and Phone on page 152.

:Contacts

Displays the “Contacts List”screen.

=For details, refer to Calling a number in the

phone book on page 63.

Hides the “Quick Access”menu.

Engb 31

Chapter

How to use the map

Switching the view mode

Various types of screen displays can be se-

lected for navigation guidance.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [View Mode].

The “View Mode”screen appears.

3 Touch the type that you want to set.

You can select the following types:

!2D View (default):

Displays a normal map (2D map).

!3D View:

Displays a map with an aerial view (3D

map).

!Street View:

Information on the next four guidance

points closest to the current location ap-

pear in order from top to bottom on the left

side of the screen.

The following information is displayed.

—Name of the next route to be taken by

the vehicle

—Arrow indicating the direction of the ve-

hicle

—Distance to the guidance points

pThis mode is available when the route is

set.

!Rear View:

Displays the rear view image on the left

side of the screen and the map on the right

side of the screen.

pThis mode is available when the rear

view camera setting is set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Setting for rear view

camera on page 154.

!Eco Graph:

Displays a graph for eco-driving on the left

side of the screen and the map on the right

side of the screen.

=For details, refer to Checking the eco-

friendly driving status on the next

page.

Engb

Chapter

04 How to use the map

This navigation system is equipped with eco-

friendly driving functions that can be used to

estimate whether you are driving in an envir-

onmentally friendly way.

This chapter describes these functions.

!The fuel mileage calculated is based on a

theoretical value determined from vehicle

speed and position information from the

navigation system. The fuel mileage dis-

played is only a reference value, and does

not guarantee the mileage displayed can be

obtained.

!The eco-friendly driving functions are an es-

timate of the real time fuel consumption to

average fuel consumption ratio and is not

an actual value.

!The eco-friendly driving functions and cal-

culations take into consideration the loca-

tion of the GPS position and speed of the

vehicle in determining a value.

Checking the eco-friendly

driving status

This function estimates approximate fuel mile-

age based on your driving, compares that with

your average fuel mileage in the past, and dis-

plays the results in a graph.

The graph appears when the map display is

set to “Eco Graph”.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [View Mode].

The “View Mode”screen appears.

3 Touch [Eco Graph].

The “Eco Graph”screen appears.

1Eco Score

The result of the comparison of your past

average fuel mileage and current average

fuel mileage appears as a value from

0.0 Pts (points) to 10.0 Pts. The higher the

value, the better the fuel mileage when

compared to past route guidance.

The green gauge indicates the current

score, and the grey gauge indicates the

best score to date.

The “Eco Score”is updated every 5 min-

utes.

pThis is not displayed when “Eco Score”

is set to “Off”or when no route is set.

2Best Score

Displays the best score to date.

pThis is not displayed when “Eco Score”

is set to “Off”or when no route is set.

3Average fuel mileage comparison graph

Displays a comparison of the average fuel

mileage up to the point the navigation sys-

tem was last stopped (past average fuel

mileage) and the current average fuel mile-

age. The display is updated every 3 sec-

onds. The more the value moves in the

direction of +, the better the fuel mileage.

There are three different graph bars.

!Total

A comparison of the past average fuel

mileage and the average fuel mileage of

the current drive.

!:Ordinary Road

A comparison of the past average fuel

mileage and the average fuel mileage

for 90 seconds in the past, while the ve-

hicle is driving on an ordinary road.

!:Motorway

A comparison of the past average fuel

mileage and the average fuel mileage

for 90 seconds in the past, while the ve-

hicle is driving on a motorway.

Engb 33

Chapter

Eco-friendly driving functions

4Animal icons

The number of displayed animal icons in-

creases or decreases according to the value

of “Eco Score”.

pThis is not displayed when “Eco Score”

is set to “Off”or when no route is set.

pEven if you use the “Eco Graph”function

immediately after you start using the navi-

gation system for the first time, may be

displayed and the function may not be avail-

able.

=For details, refer to Troubleshooting on page

181.

pThe display settings can be changed.

=For details, refer to Changing the eco-func-

tion setting on page 141.

Displaying Eco Drive Level

guidance

This navigation system is equipped with the

“Eco Drive Level”function that estimates how

well you have driven in an environmentally

friendly way.

The points of “Eco Drive Level”change ac-

cording to “Eco Score”when the vehicle

reaches the destination. When a certain num-

ber of points is reached, the level increases

and a message appears.

Tree icon

As the level increases, a tree icon changes

from a young tree to a big tree.

pThis is not displayed when “Eco Drive

Level”is set to “Off”.

=For details of the operation, refer to Chan-

ging the eco-function setting on page

141.

Sudden start alert

If the speed of the vehicle exceeds 41 km/h

(25.5 mph) within 5 seconds from the time it is

started, a message appears and a warning

sound beeps.

=For details of the operation, refer to Chan-

ging the eco-function setting on page

141.

Engb

Chapter

05 Eco-friendly driving functions

CAUTION

For safety reasons, these route-setting functions

are not available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the handbrake before set-

ting your route.

pSome information regarding traffic regula-

tions depends on the time when the route

calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-

mation may not correspond with a certain

traffic regulation when your vehicle actually

passes through the location in question.

Also, the information on the traffic regula-

tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-

cle, and not for a truck or other delivery

vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic

regulations when driving.

The basic flow of creating

your route

1Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply

the handbrake.

2Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to

Screen switching overview on page 24.

3Select the method of searching for your

destination.

4Enter the information about your destina-

tion to calculate route.

5Confirm the location on the map.

=For details, refer to Setting a route to

your destination on page 44.

6The navigation system calculates the route

to your destination, and then shows the

route on the map.

7Check and decide the route.

=For details, refer to Setting a route to

your destination on page 44.

8Your navigation system sets the route to

your destination, and the map of your sur-

roundings appears.

9Release the handbrake, drive in accordance

with navigation guidance.

Engb 35

Chapter

Searching for and selecting a location

Searching for a location by

address

The most frequently used function is “Ad-

dress”, in which the address is specified and

the destination is searched.

You can select the method of searching for a

location by address.

!Searching for a street name first

!Searching for a city name first

!Finding the location by specifying the post-

code

Searching for a street name first

pDepending on the search results, some

steps may be skipped.

pWhen you enter characters, the system will

automatically search the database for all

possible options. Only the characters you

enter are active.

pIf the search candidates number reaches

20 or less, the screen automatically

changes to the search result screen.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Address].

3 Touch the key next to “Zone”to display

the country list.

4 Touch one of the items on the list to set

the country as search area.

The screen returns to the previous screen.

5 Touch [Street].

#If you touch [History], the “City History List”

screen appears, enabling you to search by pre-

viously selected city history.

=For details, refer to Searching by selected

city history on page 39.

Engb

Chapter

06 Searching for and selecting a location

6 Enter the street name and then touch

[OK].

The “Street Selection”screen appears.

7 Touch the street you want.

8 Enter the city name and then touch

[OK].

The “Select City”screen appears.

9 Touch the desired city name.

#If you touch , the geographic centre of the

city appears on the map screen.

10 Enter the house number and then

touch [OK].

The “House Number Selection”screen ap-

pears.

#If you touch [OK] without entering the house

number, a representative location on the street in

the selected city appears.

11 Touch the desired house number range.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page 44.

Searching for a city name first

pDepending on the search results, some

steps may be skipped.

pWhen you enter characters, the system will

automatically search the database for all

possible options. Only the characters you

enter are active.

pIf the search candidates number reaches

20 or less, the screen automatically

changes to the search result screen.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Address].

The “Address Search”screen appears.

3 Touch [City].

4 Enter the city name and then touch

[OK].

The “Select City”screen appears.

5 Touch the desired city name.

#If you touch , the geographic centre of the

city appears on the map screen.

Engb 37

Chapter

Searching for and selecting a location

6 Enter the street name and then touch

[OK].

The “Street Selection”screen appears.

7 Touch the street you want.

8 Enter the house number and then

touch [OK].

The “House Number Selection”screen ap-

pears.

#If you touch [OK] without entering the house

number, a representative location on the street in

the selected city appears.

9 Touch the desired house number range.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page 44.

Finding your destination by

specifying the postcode

If you know the postcode of your destination,

you can use it to find your destination.

pDepending on the search results, some

steps may be skipped.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Address].

The “Address Search”screen appears.

3 Touch the key next to “Zone”to display

the country list.

4 Touch one of the items on the list to set

the country as search area.

The screen returns to the previous screen.

5 Touch [Postcode].

The “Enter Postcode”screen appears.

6 Input the postcode.

A list of cities with the specified postcode is

shown (except for the following cases).

British postcode:

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

Netherlands postcode:

If you input a partial postcode (4 digits) or a

complete postcode (6 digits), and touch [OK],

a list of cities is shown.

7 Touch the city or area where your desti-

nation is located.

#If you touch , the geographic centre of the

city appears on the map screen.

8 Enter the street name and then touch

[OK].

The “Street Selection”screen appears.

pIf there is no house number, the searched

location appears on the map screen.

Engb

Chapter

06 Searching for and selecting a location

9 Touch the street you want.

The “Enter House Number”screen appears.

pIf the selected street has only one matching

location, the searched location appears on

the map screen.

10 Enter the house number and then

touch [OK].

The “House Number Selection”screen ap-

pears.

#If you touch [OK] without entering the house

number, a representative location on the street in

the selected city appears.

11 Touch the desired house number range.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page 44.

Searching by selected city history

You can search the cities from the history that

you have searched by entering the name with

the keyboard and selected by “Address”,“POI”

or “Favourites”.

pThe history can store up to 50 cities.

pThe cities are listed in order of the most re-

cent search.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Address].

The “Address Search”screen appears.

3 Touch [History].

The “City History List”screen appears.

4 Touch the desired city name.

The “Street Name”screen appears.

#If you touch , the geographic centre of the

city appears on the map screen.

5 Enter the street name and then touch

[OK].

The “Street Selection”screen appears.

6 Touch the street you want.

The “Enter House Number”screen appears.

pIf the selected street has only one matching

location, the searched location appears on

the map screen.

7 Enter the house number and then

touch [OK].

The “House Number Selection”screen ap-

pears.

#If you touch [OK] without entering the house

number, a representative location on the street in

the selected city appears.

8 Touch the desired house number range.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page

44.

Setting up a route to your

home

If your home location is stored, the route to

your home can be calculated by touching a

single key.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Return Home].

pIf you have not registered your home loca-

tion, a message appears. Touch [Register]

to start registration.

=For details, refer to Registering your

home on page 141.

Engb 39

Chapter

Searching for and selecting a location

Searching for Points of

Interest (POI)

Information about various facilities (Points Of

Interest –POI), such as petrol stations, car

parks or restaurants, is available. You can

search for a POI by selecting the category (or

entering the POI Name).

Searching for POIs by preset

categories

You can search for POIs with a single touch

from the preset category.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [POI].

3 Touch the desired category.

Preset categories

The “POI List”screen appears.

4 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page 44.

Searching for a POI directly

from the name of the facilities

pIf the search candidates number reaches

20 or less, the screen automatically

changes to the search result screen.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [POI].

The “POI Search”screen appears.

3 Touch [Spell Name].

4 Enter the POI name and then touch

[OK].

The “POI List”screen appears.

#If you change the country to search, touch the

country key and display the “Zone Selection”

screen to change the setting.

Country key

pOnce the country has been selected, you

only have to change countries when your

destination is outside of the country you se-

lected.

5 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

#If you touch [Sort], the order of POI can be

sorted.

pCurrent order is indicated on the upper

right of the screen.

Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-

tance from the vehicle position.

Sorts the items in the list in order by degree

of consistency with the entered text.

Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page 44.

Engb

Chapter

06 Searching for and selecting a location

Searching for a nearby POI

You can search for POIs in your surroundings.

pUp to 300 POIs within a 160 kilometres (100

miles) radius of the vehicle position are

listed in order by distance.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [POI].

The “POI Search”screen appears.

3 Touch [Near Me].

POIs are divided into several categories.

4 Touch the category you want.

The “POI List”screen appears.

pIf there are more detailed categories within

the selected category, repeat this step as

many times as necessary.

5 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page 44.

Searching for POIs around the

destination

pThis function is available when the route is

set.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [POI].

The “POI Search”screen appears.

3 Touch [Near Destination].

POIs are divided into several categories.

4 Touch the category you want.

The “POI List”screen appears.

pIf there are more detailed categories within

the selected category, repeat this step as

many times as necessary.

5 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page 44.

Searching for POIs around the city

You can search for POIs around a specified

city.

pIf the search candidates number reaches

20 or less, the screen automatically

changes to the search result screen.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [POI].

The “POI Search”screen appears.

3 Touch [Around City].

4 Enter the city name and then touch

[OK].

The “Select City”screen appears.

#If you change the country to search, touch the

country key and display the “Zone Selection”

screen to change the setting.

Country key

pOnce the country has been selected, you

only have to change countries when your

destination is outside of the country you se-

lected.

#If you touch [History], the “City History List”

screen appears, enabling you to search by pre-

viously selected city history.

=For details, refer to Searching by selected

city history on page 39.

Engb 41

Chapter

Searching for and selecting a location

5 Touch the desired city name.

POIs are divided into several categories.

#If you touch , the geographic centre of the

city appears on the map screen.

6 Touch the category you want.

The “POI List”screen appears.

pIf there are more detailed categories within

the selected category, repeat this step as

many times as necessary.

7 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page 44.

How to read the “POI List”screen

The following information is displayed on the

“POI List”screen.

123

1Facility name

2Facility address

3Distance from the position that the search

starts

pIf you touch , detailed information of the

facility appears.

Selecting destination from

“Favourites”

Storing locations you visit frequently saves

time and effort.

Selecting an item from the list provides an

easy way to specify the position.

pThis function is not available if no locations

have been registered in “Favourites”.

=For details, refer to Storing favourite loca-

tions on page 49.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Favourites].

3 Touch the entry you want.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on page

44.

Searching for POIs by using

the data on the SD memory

card

Creating a customised POI is possible by

using the utility programme NavGate FEEDS

which is available separately, on your PC.

(NavGate FEEDS will be available on our web-

site.) Storing the customised POI properly and

inserting the SD memory card enables the sys-

tem to use the data for searches.

1 Store the item into the SD memory card

by using the NavGate FEEDS.

2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

Engb

Chapter

06 Searching for and selecting a location

3 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

4 Touch [navgate FEEDS].

The “Select POI”screen appears.

5 Touch the item you want.

6 Touch the POI you want.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on the next

page.

Selecting a location you

searched for recently

The places that you have set as destination or

waypoint in the past are automatically stored

in “History”.

pIf no location is stored in Destination His-

tory, you cannot select [History]. (If you

perform a route calculation, you can select

[History].)

p“History”can store up to 100 locations. If

the entries reach the maximum, the new

entry overwrites the oldest one.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [History].

3 Touch the entry you want.

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on the next

page.

Searching for a location by

coordinates

Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints

the location.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Coordinates].

3 Touch [East] or [West], and then enter

the longitude.

To enter W 50°1’2.5”for example, touch

[West], [0], [5], [0], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].

4 Touch [North] or [South], and then

enter the latitude.

To enter N 5°1’2.5”for example, touch [North],

[0], [5], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].

5 Touch [OK].

The searched location appears on the map

screen.

=For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-

ting a route to your destination on the next

page.

Engb 43

Chapter

Searching for and selecting a location

Setting a route to your

destination

1 Search for a location.

=For details, refer to Chapter 6.

After searching for the destination, the Loca-

tion confirmation screen appears.

2 Touch [OK].

Location confirmation screen

The destination is set, and then route calcula-

tion starts.

When the route calculation is completed,

Route confirmation screen appears.

#If you press the MODE button during route

calculation, the calculation is cancelled and the

map screen appears.

#If you touch [Scroll], the map display is chan-

ged to the scroll mode. In the scroll mode, you

can display the location more precisely to register

it, or make settings.

#If you touch [Waypoint], the location is added

to the “Waypoints List”screen.

pIf a destination is not set, [Waypoint] is not

available.

3 Touch [OK].

Route confirmation screen

123 4

Sets the displayed route as your route, and

starts the route guidance.

1Travel time to your destination

2Distance to the destination

3Estimated fuel cost to your destination

=For details, refer to Inputting the fuel

consumption information for calculating

the fuel cost on page 138.

4Route calculation condition

#If you touch , the message confirming

whether to cancel the calculated route appears.

If you touch [Yes], the calculated route is can-

celled and the map screen appears.

1Multiple Route

=For details, refer to Displaying multiple

routes on this page.

2Options

=For details, refer to Modifying the route

calculation conditions on the next page.

3Profile

=For details, refer to Checking the current

itinerary on page 46.

4Waypoints

=For details, refer to Editing waypoints on

page 47.

Displaying multiple routes

You can select a desired route from multiple

route options. Calculated routes are shown in

different colours.

pIf you set waypoints, you cannot display

multiple routes.

1 Touch [Multiple Route] on the Route

confirmation screen.

Multiple route options appear.

2 Touch to .

Another route is displayed.

3 Touch [OK].

Route confirmation screen appears.

Engb

Chapter

07 After the location is decided

Displaying the route overview

p“Route Overview”is active only when the

route is set.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Destination].

The “Destination Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [Route Overview].

1Options

=For details, refer to Modifying the route

calculation conditions on this page.

2Profile

=For details, refer to Checking the current

itinerary on the next page.

3Waypoints

=For details, refer to Editing waypoints on

page 47.

4 Touch [OK].

Modifying the route

calculation conditions

You can modify the conditions for route calcu-

lation and recalculate the current route.

1 Display the “Route Overview”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the route

overview on this page.

2 Touch [Options].

3 Touch the desired items to change the

route calculation conditions and then

touch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and the Route con-

firmation screen appears.

Items that users can operate

Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that

these are default or factory settings.

Route Condition

This setting controls how the route should be

calculated by taking into account the time, dis-

tance or main road.

Determines which condition takes priority for

route calculation.

Fast*:

Calculates a route with the shortest travel time

to your destination as a priority.

Short:

Calculates a route with the shortest distance

to your destination as a priority.

Main Road:

Calculates a route that passes major arterial

roads as a priority.

Engb 45

Chapter

Checking and modifying the current route

Avoid Toll Road

This setting controls whether toll roads (in-

cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-

count.

Off*:

Calculates a route that may include toll roads

(including toll areas).

On:

Calculates a route that avoids toll roads (in-

cluding toll areas).

pThe system may calculate a route that in-

cludes toll roads even if “On”is selected.

Avoid Ferry

This setting controls whether ferry crossings

should be taken into account.

Off*:

Calculates a route that may include ferries.

On:

Calculates a route that avoids ferries.

pThe system may calculate a route that in-

cludes ferries even if “On”is selected.

Avoid Motorway

This setting controls whether motorways may

be included in the route calculation.

Off*:

Calculates a route that may include motor-

ways.

On:

Calculates a route that avoids motorways.

pThe system may calculate a route that in-

cludes motorways even if “On”is selected.

Time restrictions

This setting controls whether streets or

bridges that have traffic restrictions during a

certain time should be taken into account.

pIf you want to set your route to avoid raised

draw bridges, select “On”.

On*:

Calculates a route while avoiding streets or

bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-

tain time.

Off:

Calculates a route while ignoring traffic re-

strictions.

pThe system may calculate a route that in-

cludes streets or bridges that are subject to

traffic restrictions during a certain time

even if “On”is selected.

CAUTION

If the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-

gation system cannot consider traffic regulations

correctly. Set the time difference correctly.

=For details, refer to Setting the time difference

on page 151.

Learning Route

The system learns the travel history of your ve-

hicle for each road.

This setting controls whether or not the travel

history should be taken into account.

On*:

Calculates a route with the travel history taken

into account.

Off:

Calculates a route without the travel history

taken into account.

Clear:

Clears the current travel history.

Checking the current itinerary

You can check the route details.

1 Display the “Route Overview”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the route

overview on the previous page.

2 Touch [Profile].

The “Route Profile”screen appears.

Engb

Chapter

08 Checking and modifying the current route

Editing waypoints

You can edit waypoints (locations you want to

visit on the way to your destination) and recal-

culate the route so that it passes through

these locations.

Adding a waypoint

Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints

and final destination can be sorted automati-

cally or manually.

1 Display the “Route Overview”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the route

overview on page 45.

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The “Waypoints List”screen appears.

3 Touch [Add].

The “Select Search Method”screen appears.

4 Search for a location.

=For details, refer to Chapter 6.

5 Touch [OK].

6 Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”

screen.

The route is recalculated, and the Route con-

firmation screen appears.

pIf you set waypoints, you cannot display

multiple routes.

Deleting a waypoint

You can delete waypoints from the route and

then recalculate the route. (You can delete

successive waypoints.)

1 Display the “Route Overview”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the route

overview on page 45.

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The “Waypoints List”screen appears.

3 Touch [Delete] next to the waypoint

that you want to delete.

The touched waypoint will be deleted from the

list.

4 Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”

screen.

The route is recalculated, and the Route con-

firmation screen appears.

5 Touch [OK].

The map of the current position appears.

Engb 47

Chapter

Checking and modifying the current route

Sorting waypoints

You can sort waypoints and recalculate the

route.

pYou cannot sort waypoints that you have al-

ready passed.

1 Display the “Route Overview”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the route

overview on page 45.

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The “Waypoints List”screen appears.

3 Touch [Sort].

The “Sort Waypoints”screen appears.

4 Touch the waypoint or destination.

Put them in the desired order.

#If you touch [Automatic], the destination and

waypoints are sorted in the order of a nearest

waypoint from the current location in the direct

aerial path.

#If you touch [Clear], waypoint sort is can-

celled.

5 Touch [OK].

The “Waypoints List”screen appears.

6 Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”

screen.

The route is recalculated, and the Route con-

firmation screen appears.

7 Touch [OK].

The map of the current position appears.

Cancelling the route guidance

If you no longer need to travel to your destina-

tion, follow the steps below to cancel the route

guidance.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Cancel Route].

A message confirming the cancellation of the

current route appears.

3 Touch [Yes].

The current route is deleted, and a map of

your surroundings reappears.

#If you touch [Skip], the next waypoint is

skipped and a new route is calculated. All other

waypoints remain.

When the route calculation is completed, Route

confirmation screen appears.

p[Skip] is available only when a waypoint is

set.

#If you touch [No], the previous screen returns

without deleting the route.

Engb

Chapter

08 Checking and modifying the current route

Storing favourite locations

Storing your favourite locations as “Favour-

ites”provides you with the opportunity to save

the time and effort of re-entering this informa-

tion. Stored items can be made available on

“Favourites”later.

Registering a location by

“Favourites”

“Favourites”can store up to 400 locations.

Home location is counted as one of the items

in “Favourites”.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Favourites].

The “Favourites”screen appears.

3 Touch [Add].

The “Select Search Method”screen appears.

4 Search for a location.

=For details about the search methods, refer

to Chapter 6.

5 When the map of the location you

want to register is displayed, touch [OK].

The location is registered, and then the “Edit

Favourite”screen appears.

=For details, refer to Editing the favourite loca-

tion in the list on this page.

6 Touch [OK].

The registration is complete.

Registering a location by scroll

mode

pThis function is available when “Registra-

tion”is set in the “Quick Access”menu.

=For details, refer to Selecting the “Quick

Access”menu on page 149.

1 Touch and drag the screen to scroll the

map to the position that you want to regis-

ter.

2 Touch to display the “Quick Access”

menu.

3 Touch .

The location is registered, and then the “Edit

Favourite”screen appears.

=For details, refer to Editing the favourite loca-

tion in the list on this page.

4 Touch [OK].

The registration is complete.

Editing registered locations

Editing the favourite location

in the list

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Favourites].

The “Favourites”screen appears.

3 Touch next to the location that you

want to edit.

The “Edit Favourite”screen appears.

4 Touch the item that you want to

change the setting.

Engb 49

Chapter

Registering and editing locations

1Name

You can enter the desired name.

pUp to 17 characters can be input for the

name.

2Phone#

You can edit the registered phone number.

To dial the number, touch [Call].

The maximum digits you can enter for the

phone number is 15.

3Icon

You can change the symbol displayed on

the map and “Favourites”.

4Modify Location

You can change the registered location by

scrolling the map.

5 Touch [OK].

The registration is complete.

Editing your home

When you have already registered your home,

you can edit the information of your home.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Favourites].

pHome location is displayed on the top of

the list.

3 Touch next to the home location.

The “Edit Favourite”screen appears.

4 Touch the item that you want to

change the setting.

1Phone#

To dial the number, touch [Call].

2Modify Location

You can change the registered location by

scrolling the map.

pFor home information, [Name] and [Icon]

are not editable.

5 Touch [OK].

The registration is complete.

Sorting the favourite locations

in the list

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Favourites].

The “Favourites”screen appears.

3 Touch [Sort].

Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort

order.

pCurrent order is indicated on the upper

right of the screen.

Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-

cently used items.

Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.

Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-

tance from the vehicle position.

Engb

Chapter

09 Registering and editing locations

Deleting a favourite location

from the list

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Favourites].

The “Favourites”screen appears.

3 Touch [Delete].

4 Select the location you want to delete.

A tick mark appears next to the selected loca-

tion.

#If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If

you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].

5 Touch [Delete].

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

6 Touch [Yes].

The data you selected is deleted.

#If you touch [No], the deletion is cancelled.

Exporting and importing

favourite locations

Exporting favourite locations

You can export the “Favourites”data to an SD

memory card for editing by using the utility

programme NavGate FEEDS which is available

separately, on your PC.

pIf there is previous data in the SD memory

card, the data is overwritten with new data.

1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

2 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

3 Touch [Favourites].

The “Favourites”screen appears.

4 Touch .

Data export starts.

After the data is exported, the completion mes-

sage appears.

5 Touch [OK].

The “Favourites”screen appears.

Importing favourite locations

You can import the locations that you have edi-

ted on the utility programme NavGate FEEDS

to “Favourites”.

pWhen a location that is already registered

in “Favourites”is imported, the location is

overwritten.

1 Store the item into the SD memory card

by using the NavGate FEEDS.

Engb 51

Chapter

Registering and editing locations

2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

3 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

4 Touch [Favourites].

The “Favourites”screen appears.

5 Touch .

The message confirming whether to replace

the stored items appears.

6 Touch [Yes].

Data import starts.

After importing the data is finished, the “Fa-

vourites”screen appears.

Deleting the destination

history from the list

Items in “History”can be deleted. All entries

in “History”can be deleted at once.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [History].

The “Destination History List”screen ap-

pears.

3 Touch [Delete].

The “Delete from History”screen appears.

4 Select the location you want to delete.

A tick mark appears next to the selected loca-

tion.

#If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If

you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].

5 Touch [Delete].

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

6 Touch [Yes].

The data you selected is deleted.

#If you touch [No], the deletion is cancelled.

Engb

Chapter

09 Registering and editing locations

You can check real-time traffic information

transmitted by the Traffic Message Channel

(TMC) of the FM Radio Data System (RDS) on

the screen. Such traffic information is updated

periodically. When the navigation system re-

ceives updated traffic information, the naviga-

tion system will overlay the traffic information

on your map and also display detailed text in-

formation when available. When you are tra-

velling along a route and there is traffic

information on your current route, the system

will detect it and ask you if you would like to

be rerouted, or suggest another route automa-

tically.

pThe system acquires the traffic information

up to 150 km in radius from the vehicle po-

sition. (If there is a lot of traffic information

around your vehicle, the radius will be

shorter than 150 km.)

pThe navigation system provides the follow-

ing functions by using the information

from RDS-TMC service:

!Displaying a list of traffic information

!Displaying traffic information on a map

!Suggesting a route to avoid traffic jams

by using traffic information

pThe term “traffic jam”in this section indi-

cates the following types of traffic informa-

tion: slow, queuing and stationary traffic

and closed/blocked roads. This information

is always taken into consideration when

checking your route, and the information

related with these events cannot be turned

off. If you select other traffic information in

“Traffic Settings”, the information can be

displayed in a list or on a map.

=For details, refer to Selecting traffic infor-

mation to display on page 56.

Checking all traffic

information

Traffic information is displayed on a screen in

the form of a list. This allows you to check how

many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-

cation and their distance from your current po-

sition.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Traffic].

The “Traffic Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [Traffic List].

The “Traffic List”screen appears.

The list with received traffic information is

shown.

4 Select an incident you want to view in

detail.

The details of the selected incident are dis-

played.

pTouching an incident you want to see allows

you to view the detailed information of the

incident. If the information cannot be dis-

played on one screen, touch or to view

the remaining information.

pTouching allows you to check the loca-

tion on a map. (Traffic information without

positional information cannot be checked

on a map.)

#If you touch [Sort], the traffic information can

be sorted.

Each time you touch the key changes the setting.

You can sort the traffic information by dis-

tance from your current position.

When you touch [Traffic List], the list dis-

played will be sorted according to the linear

distance from the vehicle position to the

traffic information.

When you touch [Traffic on Route], the list

displayed will be sorted according to the

distance from the vehicle position to the

traffic information.

You can sort the traffic information in alpha-

betical order.

Engb 53

Chapter

Using traffic information

You can sort the traffic information accord-

ing to the incident.

The list will be sorted in the order of closed/

blocked roads, traffic jam, accidents, road

works and others.

Current order is indicated on the upper right of

the screen.

#If you touch [Refresh] while new traffic infor-

mation is received, current information is chan-

ged and old information is removed. The traffic

information list is updated to reflect the new si-

tuation.

5 Touch .

The previous screen returns.

Checking traffic

information on the route

All traffic information on the current route is

displayed on screen in a list.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Traffic].

The “Traffic Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [Traffic on Route].

The “Traffic on Route”screen appears.

The method for checking the content dis-

played on the screen is the same as “Traffic

List”screen.

=For details, refer to Checking all traffic infor-

mation on the previous page.

How to read traffic

information on the map

The traffic event information displayed on the

map is as follows.

pA line is displayed only when the map scale

is 5 km (2.5 miles) or lower.

pIcons appear only when the scale on the

map is 20 km (10 miles) or lower. If the

scale is changed, the icons are resized ac-

cording to the selected scale.

Traffic event icon

!with yellow line:

Slow and queuing traffic

!with red line:

Stationary traffic

!with black line:

Closed/blocked roads

!etc.:

Accidents, constructions, etc.

pFor meanings of other icons, check them

the “Traffic Type Settings”screen.

For details of the operations, refer to Selecting

traffic information to display on page 56.

Engb

Chapter

10 Using traffic information

Setting an alternative

route to avoid traffic jams

The navigation system checks at regular inter-

vals whether or not there is the traffic informa-

tion on your route. If the navigation system

detects any traffic jams on your current route,

the system tries to find a better route in the

background.

pThe following types of traffic incidents on

the route will be checked: slow, queuing

and stationary traffic, and closed/blocked

roads except for closed motorway exits/en-

trances.

Checking for traffic jams

automatically

If there is information about traffic jams on

your current route and if an alternative route

can be found, the navigation system will re-

commend a new alternative route automati-

cally. In such a case, the following screen will

appear.

1Difference in distance and travel time between

the existing route and new route.

2Distance from the current position of your ve-

hicle to the point of entry into the new route.

pThere is no action if the system cannot find

any traffic jam information on your route or

the system cannot find an alternative.

1 Touch [New].

The recommended route is displayed on the

screen.

#If you touch [Current] while the recom-

mended route is displayed, the screen switches

to the current route display.

2 Touch [OK].

The displayed route is set.

pWhen no selection is made, the screen re-

turns to the previous screen.

Checking traffic information

manually

Touching the notification icon on the map

screen allows you to check traffic information

on your route while the icon is displayed. The

notification icon is only displayed on the navi-

gation map screen if there is any traffic infor-

mation on your route.

pThe notification icon is not available if your

vehicle deviates from the route.

1 Set [Show Traffic Incident] to “View”.

=For details, refer to Displaying the traffic no-

tification icon on page 144.

2 Display the map screen.

The icon appears when the system acquires

traffic information on the current route.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

3 Touch the notification icon while the

icon is displayed.

Notification icon

Traffic information on the current route is dis-

played on the map screen.

4 Touch [Diversion] to search for an alter-

native route.

Engb 55

Chapter

Using traffic information

After touching [Diversion], the route is recal-

culated taking all traffic jams on your current

route into account.

p[Diversion] will be available only when the

system can find traffic jams.

pNotification icon shows the nearest traffic

information on the route. However, if you

touch [Diversion], the route is recalculated

by taking into account not only this infor-

mation, but also all traffic jam information

on the route.

=For details, refer to Checking for traffic jams

automatically on the previous page.

#If you touch [List], the “Traffic on Route”

screen appears.

#If you touch , the message disappears and

the map screen returns.

Selecting traffic

information to display

There are different types of traffic information

that can be received via the RDS-TMC service,

and you can select which types will be incor-

porated and displayed on your navigation sys-

tem.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Traffic].

The “Traffic Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [Traffic Settings].

The “Traffic Settings”screen appears.

4 Touch [Displayed Traffic Info].

The “Traffic Type Settings”screen appears.

5 Touch the traffic information item to

display.

A tick mark appears next to the selected traffic

information.

#If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If

you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].

6 Touch [OK].

The selected traffic information icon is added

to the screen.

7 Touch [OK].

Selecting preferred RDS-TMC

service provider manually

A default preferred TMC service provider for

each country has been set. The navigation sys-

tem tunes to the radio station with good recep-

tion among the preferred RDS-TMC service

providers. If you want to set another preferred

RDS-TMC service provider, you can manually

select one from available RDS-TMC service

providers.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Traffic].

The “Traffic Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [TMC Provider Selection].

4 Touch the desired service provider on

the list.

After touching a service provider, the system

starts tuning to the selected RDS-TMC service

provider. When the tuning is successful, the

system returns to the map display.

Engb

Chapter

10 Using traffic information

If your devices feature Bluetooth®technology,

this navigation system can be connected to

your devices wirelessly. This section describes

how to set up a Bluetooth connection.

For details about the connectivity with the de-

vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology,

refer to the information on our website.

Preparing communication

devices

This navigation system has a built-in function

to use devices featuring Bluetooth wireless

technology.

=For details, refer to Notes for hands-free

phoning on page 70.

You can register and use devices that feature

the following profiles with this navigation sys-

tem.

!HFP (Hands Free Profile)

!A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Pro-

file)

pIf the registered device features both HFP

and A2DP, the hands-free connection is

made and then the Bluetooth audio con-

nection is made.

If the registered device features either pro-

file, the corresponding connection is made.

pWhen the navigation system is turned off,

the Bluetooth connection is also discon-

nected. When the system restarts, the sys-

tem automatically attempts to reconnect

the previously-connected device. Even

when the connection is severed for some

reason, the system automatically recon-

nects the specified device (except when the

connection is severed due to device oper-

ation).

Registering your Bluetooth

devices

You need to register your devices featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology when you con-

nect it for the first time. A total of 5 devices

can be registered. Three registration methods

are available:

!Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices

!Pairing from your Bluetooth devices

!Searching for a specified Bluetooth device

pIf you try to register more than 5 devices,

the system will ask you to select one of the

registered devices to delete.

=For details, refer to Deleting a registered

device on page 60.

Searching for nearby Bluetooth

devices

The system searches for available Bluetooth

devices near the navigation system, displays

them in a list, and registers them for connec-

tion.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your devices.

For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action

is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless

technology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your devices.

2 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

3 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

4 Touch [Registration].

The “Nearby Device List”screen appears.

The system searches for Bluetooth devices

waiting for the connection and displays them

in the list if a device is found.

pUp to 30 devices will be listed in the order

that the devices are found.

5 Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-

pears in the list.

Engb 57

Chapter

Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

pIf you cannot find the Bluetooth device that

you want to connect, check that the device

is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology connection.

6 Touch the Bluetooth device name you

want to register.

#If you touch [Search Again], the system starts

searching for Bluetooth devices waiting for con-

nection, and displays them in the list format

when any devices are detected.

7 Enter the password (the default pass-

word is “1111”) using the Bluetooth de-

vice.

Enter the password while the message “Please

follow the instructions on your mobile

phone.”appears.

The device is registered in the navigation sys-

tem.

After the device is successfully registered, the

Bluetooth connection is established from the

navigation system.

Pairing from your Bluetooth

devices

You can register the Bluetooth device by set-

ting the navigation system to standby mode

and requesting connection from the Bluetooth

device.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your devices.

For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action

is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless

technology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your devices.

2 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

3 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

4 Touch [Registration].

The “Nearby Device List”screen appears.

5 Touch [Register from mobile phone].

The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth

wireless technology connection.

6 Register the navigation system on your

Bluetooth device.

If your device asks you to enter a password,

enter the password of the navigation system.

When the device is successfully registered,

the connection settings are made from the de-

vice.

pIf registration fails, repeat the procedure

from the beginning.

Engb

Chapter

11 Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

Searching for a specified

Bluetooth device

If you cannot connect your Bluetooth device

using the nearby device search and if your

Bluetooth device is found in the list, try the fol-

lowing method.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your devices.

For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action

is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless

technology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your devices.

2 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

3 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

4 Touch [Registration].

The “Nearby Device List”screen appears.

5 Touch [Select specific devices].

The “Select specific devices”screen appears.

6 Touch the Bluetooth device name to be

connected.

The system searches for Bluetooth devices

waiting for the connection and displays them

in the list if a device is found.

pIf you cannot find the desired device name

on the list, touch [Other phones] to search

the devices available nearby.

7 Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-

pears in the list.

pIf you cannot find the Bluetooth device that

you want to connect, check that the device

is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology connection.

8 Touch the Bluetooth device name you

want to register.

Engb 59

Chapter

Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

#If you touch [Search Again], the system starts

searching for Bluetooth devices waiting for con-

nection, and displays them in the list format

when any devices are detected.

9 Enter the password (the default pass-

word is “1111”) using the Bluetooth de-

vice.

Enter the password while the message “Please

follow the instructions on your mobile

phone.”appears.

The device is registered in the navigation sys-

tem.

After the device is successfully registered, the

Bluetooth connection is established from the

navigation system.

Deleting a registered device

When you have already registered 5 Bluetooth

devices and you want to add another one, you

must first delete one of the registered devices.

pIf a registered phone is deleted, all the

phone book entries and call history lists

that correspond to the phone will be also

cleared.

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Registration].

A message prompting you to delete a regis-

tered device appears.

4 Touch [OK].

The “Delete from Connection List”screen

appears.

5 Touch the Bluetooth device name that

you want to delete.

The device is deleted.

Connecting a registered

Bluetooth device manually

The navigation system automatically connects

the Bluetooth device selected as the target of

connection. However, connect the Bluetooth

device manually in the following cases:

!Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis-

tered, and you want to manually select the

device to be used.

!You want to reconnect a disconnected

Bluetooth device.

!Connection cannot be established automa-

tically for some reason.

If you start connection manually, carry out the

following procedure. You can also connect the

Bluetooth device by having the navigation sys-

tem detect it automatically.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your devices.

For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action

is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless

technology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your devices.

2 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

3 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

4 Touch [Connection].

The “Connection List”screen appears.

Engb

Chapter

11 Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

5 Touch the name of the device that you

want to connect.

The “Select Profile”screen appears.

6 Touch the profile that you want to con-

nect.

You can select the following profiles:

!Handsfree and Audio:

Connects the device as the hands-free

phone and the Bluetooth audio player.

!Audio:

Connects the device as Bluetooth audio

player.

!Handsfree:

Connects the device as the hands-free

phone.

Connection starts.

When a connection is successfully estab-

lished, a connection complete message ap-

pears and the map screen returns by touching

[OK].

pTo cancel the connection to your device,

touch [Cancel].

pIf connection fails, check whether your de-

vice is waiting for a connection and then

retry.

Setting for priority connecting

The selected device is set for priority connect-

ing.

And one of the following icons is indicated

next to the device name.

Appears when the device is registered so

that it will be preferentially paired with both

the hands-free and Bluetooth audio con-

nection.

Appears when the device is registered so

that it will be preferentially paired with the

Bluetooth audio connection.

Appears when the device is registered so

that it can be preferentially paired with the

hands-free connection.

Engb 61

Chapter

Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device

CAUTION

For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as

much as possible while driving.

If your mobile phone features Bluetooth tech-

nology, this navigation system can be con-

nected to your mobile phone wirelessly. Using

this hands-free function, you can operate the

navigation system to make or receive phone

calls. You can also transfer the phone book

data stored in your mobile phone to the navi-

gation system. This section describes how to

set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-

erate a mobile phone featuring Bluetooth

technology on the navigation system.

For details about the connectivity with the de-

vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology,

refer to the information on our website.

Displaying the phone menu

Use the “Phone Menu”if you connect the mo-

bile phone to the navigation system for utilisa-

tion.

=For details, refer to Chapter 11.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Phone].

The “Phone Menu”screen appears.

21 3 45

1Name of connected mobile phone

2Network name of the mobile phone com-

pany

3Strength of the Bluetooth connection be-

tween the navigation system and the device

4Reception status of the mobile phone

5Battery status of the mobile phone

Making a phone call

You can make a phone call in many different

ways.

Direct dialling

1 Display the “Phone Menu”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on this page.

2 Touch [Dial Pad].

The “Dial Input”screen appears.

3 Touch the number keys to enter the

phone number.

The phone number that was input is dis-

played.

When the input is complete, [OK] becomes

active.

#If you touch , the entered number is deleted

one digit at a time from the end of the number.

Press and hold to delete all digits.

#If you touch , the previous screen returns.

4 Touch [OK] to make a call.

pTo cancel the call after the system starts

dialling, touch .

5 Touch to end the call.

Engb

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

Making a call home easily

You can call home without taking the time to

enter the phone number if the phone number

has been registered.

1 Display the “Phone Menu”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on the previous page.

2 Touch [Call Home].

Dialling home starts.

pIf you have not registered your home num-

ber, a message appears. Touch [Register]

to start registration.

=For details, refer to Registering your

home on page 141.

Calling a number in the phone

book

You can select and call a contact from the

phone book entries transferred to the naviga-

tion system.

pBefore using this function, you need to

transfer the phone book entries stored in

your mobile phone to the navigation sys-

tem.

=For details, refer to Transferring the phone

book on page 66.

Searching for a contact to call on the

alphabet tabs

1 Display the “Phone Menu”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on the previous page.

2 Touch [Contacts].

The “Contacts List”screen appears.

3 Touch alphabet tabs.

The screen jumps to the top of the page dis-

playing the entries that start with the selected

letter or number.

pTouching [#ABCDE] displays all entries that

start with symbols or numbers.

pTouching [Others] displays the page includ-

ing entries that are not assigned to any of

the other tabs.

4 Touch the desired name on the list.

The “Contacts Type Selection”screen ap-

pears.

5 Touch the desired entry on the list to

make a call.

6 Touch to end the call.

Calling a number by searching by name

1 Display the “Phone Menu”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on the previous page.

2 Touch [Contacts].

The “Contacts List”screen appears.

3 Touch [Search].

The “Contacts Name Search”screen appears.

You can search by the names registered in the

“Contacts List”screen.

Engb 63

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

4 Enter the desired name and then touch

[OK].

The “Contacts Name Search Results”screen

appears.

5 Touch the desired name on the list.

The “Contacts Type Selection”screen ap-

pears.

6 Touch the desired entry on the list to

make a call.

7 Touch to end the call.

Dialling from the history

The most recent calls made (dialled), received

and missed are stored in the call history list.

You can browse the call history list and call

numbers from it.

pEach call history saves 30 calls per regis-

tered mobile phone. If the number of calls

exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.

1 Display the “Phone Menu”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 62.

2 Touch [Received Calls], [Dialled Calls] or

[Missed Calls].

The selected call history list appears.

3 Touch an entry on the list.

Dialling starts.

pTo cancel the call after the system starts

dialling, touch .

#If you touch [Detail], the “Detailed Informa-

tion”screen appears.

You can check the details of the party before mak-

ing a phone call.

4 Touch to end the call.

Dialling a favourite location

You can make a call to an entry stored in the

“Favourites”list.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Favourites].

The “Favourites”screen appears.

3 Touch next to the location that you

want to make a call.

The “Edit Favourite”screen appears.

4 Touch [Call] to make a call.

pTo cancel the call after the system starts

dialling, touch .

5 Touch to end the call.

Dialling a facility’s phone number

You can make a call to facilities with phone

number data.

pYou cannot make a call to locations or POIs

that have no phone number data.

1 Display the “Destination Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

Engb

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

2 Touch [POI].

The “POI Search”screen appears.

3 Search for the POI.

The “POI List”screen appears.

=For details of the operation, refer to Search-

ing for Points of Interest (POI) on page 40.

4 Touch next to the POI that you want

to call.

The “POI Information”screen appears.

5 Touch [Call] to make a call.

pTo cancel the call after the system starts

dialling, touch .

6 Touch to end the call.

Dialling from the map

You can make a call by selecting the icon of a

registered location or a POI icon from the map

screen.

pYou cannot make a call to locations or POIs

that have no phone number data.

1 Scroll the map, and place the cursor on

an icon on the map.

2 Touch .

The “Information List”screen appears.

3 Touch the POI you want.

The “POI Information”screen appears.

4 Touch [Call] to make a call.

pTo cancel the call after the system starts

dialling, touch .

5 Touch to end the call.

Receiving a phone call

You can perform hands-free answering by

using the navigation system.

Answering an incoming call

The system informs you that it is receiving a

call by displaying a message and producing a

ring sound.

pYou can set the system to automatically an-

swer incoming calls. If not set to automati-

cally answer incoming calls, you will have

to answer the calls manually.

=For details, refer to Answering a call

automatically on page 68.

pIf the voice on the other end of the call is

too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume

of the received voice.

=For details, refer to Setting the Volume

for Guidance and Phone on page 152.

pThe registered name appears if the phone

number of the received call is already regis-

tered in “Contacts”.

pDepending on the caller ID service, the

phone number of the received call may not

be displayed. “Unknown”appears instead.

1 To answer an incoming call, touch .

The operation menu during a call appears.

#If you touch [Vol –]or[Vol +], you can adjust

the ring tone volume.

#If you touch , an incoming call is re-

jected.

The rejected call is recorded in the missed call

history list.

=For details, refer to Dialling from the history

on the previous page.

Engb 65

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

2 Touch to end the call.

The call ends.

pYou may hear a noise when you hang up

the phone.

#If you touch [Vol –]or[Vol +], you can adjust

the volume when talking.

#If you touch [Close Menu], the operation

menu during call is minimised.

To display the menu again, touch .

Transferring the phone book

You can transfer the phone book entries from

your mobile phone to the phone book of the

navigation system.

pDepending on the mobile phone, phone

book may be called Contacts, Business

Card or something else.

pWith some mobile phones, it may not be

possible to transfer the entire phone book

at once. In this case, transfer addresses

one at a time from your phone book using

your mobile phone.

pIf you connect the mobile phone featuring

auto-synchronisation function, phone book

transfer or synchronisation will be automa-

tically performed.

pA maximum of 1 000 entries can be trans-

ferred per mobile phone. If the entries ex-

ceed 1 000, the extra entries will not be

transferred. If more than one number is re-

gistered for one person, such as work place

and home, each number may be counted

separately.

pEach entry can hold up to 5 phone num-

bers.

pDepending on the mobile phone that is

connected to this navigation system via

Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-

tem may not be able to display the phone

book correctly. (Some characters may be

garbled.)

pIf the phone book in the mobile phone con-

tains image data, the phone book may not

be correctly transferred.

pThe transferred data cannot be edited on

the navigation system.

1 Connect the mobile phone that has the

phone book to transfer.

=For details, refer to Connecting a registered

Bluetooth device manually on page 60.

2 Touch [Contacts Transfer] on the

“Phone Menu”screen.

3 Check that the following screen is dis-

played, and operate your mobile phone to

transfer the phone book entries.

When data transfer is finished, a message ask-

ing whether you want to transfer more data

appears.

Touch [Yes] to continue the transfer.

Engb

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

4 Touch [No].

The transferred data is imported to the naviga-

tion system.

When the data is successfully imported, an

import complete message is displayed and the

“Contacts List”screen appears.

pIt may take time depending on how many

entries will be transferred.

Changing the order of names in

the phone book

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Sort Order].

Each touch of [Sort Order] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!First (default):

Switches the contacts entries to first/last

name display and sort the entries by order

of first name.

!Last:

Switches the contacts entries to last/first

name display and sort the entries by order

of last name.

pDepending on the type of mobile phone, the

settings may not be available.

Deleting registered contacts

1 Display the “Phone Menu”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the phone

menu on page 62.

2 Touch [Contacts].

The “Contacts List”screen appears.

3 Touch [Delete].

The “Delete from Contacts”screen appears.

4 Touch the entry you want to delete.

A tick mark appears next to the entry.

#If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If

you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].

5 Touch [Delete].

The message confirming whether to delete the

entry appears.

6 Touch [Yes].

The entry is deleted.

#If you touch [No], the deletion is cancelled.

Changing the phone settings

Editing the device name

You can change the device name to be dis-

played on your mobile phone. (Default is

“PIONEER NAVI”.)

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Device Name].

The keyboard to enter the name appears.

4 Touch to delete the current name,

and enter the new name by using the key-

board.

Engb 67

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

pUp to 16 characters can be entered for a de-

vice name.

5 Touch [OK].

The name is changed.

Editing the password

You can change the password to be used for

authentication on your mobile phone. (Default

is “1111”.)

pFour to eight characters can be entered for

a password.

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Password].

The “Set Password”screen appears.

4 Touch to delete the current pass-

word, and enter the new password by

using the keyboard.

5 Touch [OK].

The password is changed.

Stopping Bluetooth wave

transmission

You can stop transmission of electric waves by

turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do

not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we

recommend selecting “Off”.

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Bluetooth On/Off].

Each touch of [Bluetooth On/Off] changes

the settings as follows:

!On (default):

Turns on Bluetooth function.

!Off:

Turns off Bluetooth function.

Echo cancelling and noise

reduction

When you are operating hands-free phoning

in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable

echo. This function reduces the echo and

noise while you are using hands-free phoning,

and maintains a certain sound quality.

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Echo Cancel].

Each touch of [Echo Cancel] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!On (default):

Activates echo cancelling and noise reduc-

tion.

!Off:

Deactivates echo cancelling and noise re-

duction.

Answering a call automatically

The navigation system automatically answers

incoming calls to the mobile phone, so you

can answer a call while driving without taking

your hands off the steering wheel.

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Auto Answer Preference].

The “Auto Answer Preference”screen ap-

pears.

Engb

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

4 Touch the desired option.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

!Off (default):

No automatic response. Respond manually.

!Immediately:

Answers immediately.

!After 3 seconds:

Answers after three seconds.

!After 6 seconds:

Answers after six seconds.

!After 10 seconds:

Answers after ten seconds.

Setting the automatic rejection

function

If this function is on, the navigation system

automatically rejects all incoming calls.

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Refuse All Calls].

Each touch of [Refuse All Calls] changes the

settings as follows:

!Off (default):

Accepts all incoming calls.

!On:

Rejects all incoming calls.

pIf both “Refuse All Calls”and “Auto An-

swer Preference”are activated, “Refuse

All Calls”takes priority and all incoming

calls are automatically rejected.

pIf “Refuse All Calls”is set to “On”, rejected

incoming calls will not be stored in the

missed call list.

Clearing memory

You can clear the memory of each item that

corresponds to the connected mobile phone:

phone book, dialled/received/missed call his-

tory list and preset dials.

1 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Clear Memory].

The “Clear Memory”screen appears.

4 Touch the desired option.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

!Contacts:

Clears the registered phone book.

!Received Calls List:

Clears the received call history list.

!Dialled Calls List:

Clears the dialled call history list.

!Missed Calls List:

Clears the missed call history list.

#If you touch [Clear All], all the data is cleared

that correspond to the connected mobile phone.

5 Touch [Yes].

Data on the selected item is cleared from this

navigation system’s memory.

#If you do not want to clear the memory that

you have selected, touch [No].

Engb 69

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

Updating the Bluetooth

wireless technology software

Update files will be available for download in

the future. You will be able to download the lat-

est update from an appropriate website to

your PC.

pBefore you download the files and install

the update, read through the instructions

on the website. Follow the instructions on

the website for steps until [Firmware up-

date] becomes active.

1 Store the updated files into the SD

memory card.

2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

3 Display the “Settings Menu”screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

4 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].

The “Bluetooth Settings”screen appears.

5 Touch [Firmware update].

The current version is displayed.

6 Touch [Firmware update].

The message confirming whether or not to

start the update will appear.

7 Touch [Yes].

Update starts.

8 Wait until the upgrade process is com-

plete.

A message will appear after the update is

complete.

9 Touch [OK].

The message disappears, and the map screen

returns.

10 Eject the SD memory card.

Notes for hands-free phoning

General notes

!Connection to all mobile phones featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-

anteed.

!The line-of-sight distance between this na-

vigation system and your mobile phone

must be 10 metres or less when sending

and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth

technology. However, the actual transmis-

sion distance may be shorter than the esti-

mated distance, depending on the usage

environment.

!With some mobile phones, the ring sound

may not be output from the speakers.

!If private mode is selected on the mobile

phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-

abled.

Registration and connection

!Mobile phone operations vary depending

on the type of mobile phone. Refer to the

instruction manual that came with your

mobile phone for detailed instructions.

!With mobile phones, phone book transfer

may not work even though your phone is

paired with the navigation system. In that

case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-

ing again from your phone to the naviga-

tion system, and then perform the phone

book transfer.

Making and receiving calls

!You may hear a noise in the following situa-

tions:

Engb

Chapter

12 Using hands-free phoning

—When you answer the phone by using

the button on the phone.

—When the person on the other end of

line hangs up the phone.

!If the person on the other end of the phone

call cannot hear the conversation due to an

echo, decrease the volume level for hands-

free phoning. This may reduce the echo.

!With some mobile phones, even if you

press the accept button on the mobile

phone when a call comes in, hands-free

phoning may not be performed.

!The registered name appears if the phone

number of the received call is already regis-

tered in the phone book. When one phone

number is registered under different

names, the name that comes first in the

phone book is displayed.

!If the phone number of the received call is

not registered in the phone book, the

phone number of the received call appears.

The received call history and the

dialled number history

!Calls made or editing performed only on

your mobile phone will not be reflected to

the dialled number history or phone book

in the navigation system.

!You cannot make a call to the entry of an

unknown user (no phone number) in the re-

ceived call history.

!If calls are made by operating your mobile

phone, no history data will be recorded in

the navigation system.

Phone book transfers

!If there are more than 1 000 phone book en-

tries on your mobile phone, all entries may

not be downloaded completely.

!With some mobile phones, it may not be

possible to transfer all items in the phone

book at one time. In this case, transfer

items one by one from your mobile phone.

!Depending on the mobile phone, this navi-

gation system may not display the phone

book correctly. (Some characters may be

garbled, or first and last names may be re-

versed.)

!If the phone book in the mobile phone con-

tains image data, the phone book may not

be transferred correctly. (Image data can-

not be transferred from the mobile phone.)

!Depending on the mobile phone, phone

book transfer may not be available.

Engb 71

Chapter

Using hands-free phoning

This chapter describes the basic operations of

the AV source.

You can play or use the following sources with

your Pioneer navigation system.

!TUNER (FM, MW/LW)

!CD

!ROM (in MP3, AAC, WMA)

!DVD-Video

!DivX

!USB

!SD

The following sources can be played back or

used by connecting an auxiliary device.

!iPod

!Smartphone application (Aha Radio)

!Bluetooth audio

!AV input 1 (AV1)

!AV input 2 (AV2)

pWith the AVIC-F840BT, AV input 2 connec-

tion is not available. And AVIC-F840BT

shows “AV Input”as “AV1 Input”.

Displaying the AV

operation screen

%Press the MODE button when the map

screen is displayed.

pThe AV operation screen can also be dis-

played by touching [AV Source & Con-

tents] on the “Top Menu”.

Selecting a source

Source icons

1 Touch, then drag any source icons up or

down to display additional source icons.

The AV source icons will scroll, and previously

hidden icons will appear.

2 Tap the icon of the source you want to

select.

The operation screen of the selected source

appears.

pThe currently selected source icon is high-

lighted.

Operating list screens (e.g.

iPod list screen)

This describes the operations when a list

screen is displayed.

pFor information on how to display the list

screen, refer to the descriptions within the

desired source portion of this manual.

Switching between the AV

operation screen and the list

screen

The following example describes how to

switch between the AV operation screen and

the artist list screen of iPod.

1 Touch the appropriate key to display

the list that you want.

Engb

Chapter

13 Basic operations of the AV source

2 Touch the key on the right edge of the

screen.

The AV operation screen returns.

Selecting an item

1 Scroll the list by dragging items up or

down to display the item you want to se-

lect.

pFlicking a list item enables you to quickly

scroll through the list.

To stop scrolling, gently touch the list.

2 Tap the item.

pThe item currently selected is highlighted.

Returning to the previous display

%Touch to return to the previous

screen.

Engb 73

Chapter

Basic operations of the AV source

You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-

tion system. This section describes operations

for radio (FM).

The functions related to RDS (Radio Data Sys-

tem) are available only in areas with FM sta-

tions broadcasting RDS signals. Even if the

navigation system is receiving an RDS station,

not all the functions related with RDS will be

available.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Tap [FM] on the left edge of the screen

to display the “FM”screen.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on the next page.

Reading the screen

12 657843

1Band indicator

Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1

to FM3.

2Programme service name indicator

Shows the programme service name (station

name) of the current station.

3Signal level indicator

4Frequency indicator

5STEREO indicator

Shows that the frequency selected is being

broadcast in stereo.

6TEXT indicator

Shows when radio text is received.

7NEWS indicator

Shows the status of news programmes.

8TRFC indicator

Shows the status of traffic announcements.

9Current time

aProgramme service name or frequency in-

dicator

Shows the frequency of the preset item. If the

programme service name can be obtained,

the programme service name is shown in-

stead of the frequency.

bPreset number indicator

Shows what preset item has been selected.

cPTY indicator

Shows the programme type of the current sta-

tion (when available).

dRadio text display area

Displays the radio text currently received.

eSource icon

Shows which source has been selected.

Engb

Chapter

14 Using the radio (FM)

Using the touch panel keys

345

1Performs manual tuning

To tune manually, touch [o]or[p] briefly.

The frequencies move up or down one step at

a time.

Performs seek tuning

To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]

or [p] for about one second and then re-

lease. The tuner will scan frequencies until a

broadcast strong enough for good reception

is found.

pYou can cancel seek tuning by touching

either [o]or[p] briefly.

pIf you keep holding [o]or[p], you

can skip broadcasting frequencies.

Seek tuning will start at the time you re-

lease the keys.

2Selects a preset channel

The keys can be used to switch preset chan-

nels.

Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-

play the preset channel you want to select,

and tap the channel.

pThe lower keys and the upper keys ap-

pear only when the preset channel is se-

lected.

3Searches for an RDS station by PTY infor-

mation

=For details, refer to Searching for an RDS

station by PTY information on page 78.

4Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

5Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on page 77.

6Displays radio text screen

7Switches between the AV operation

screen and the preset list display

You can switch the screen display according

to your preference.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Switching between the AV operation

screen and the list screen on page 72.

8Selects an FM band

Tapping the key repeatedly switches between

the following FM bands: FM1,FM2,orFM3.

pThis function is convenient for preparing

different preset lists for each band.

Engb 75

Chapter

Using the radio (FM)

Storing and recalling broadcast

frequencies

With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys

(“P1”to “P6”), you can easily store up to six

broadcast frequencies for later recall (also

with the tap of a key).

1 Select a frequency that you want to

store in memory.

2 Display the preset channel list.

=For details, refer to Switches between the

AV operation screen and the preset list

display on the previous page.

3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]

to [P6].

Preset list display

Preset tuning keys

The selected radio station has been stored in

memory.

The next time you tap the same preset tuning

key “P1”to “P6”, the radio station frequencies

are recalled from memory.

pUp to 18 FM stations, six for each of the

three FM bands can be stored in memory.

=For details of the list operations, refer to Op-

erating list screens (e.g. iPod list screen) on

page 72.

Using radio text

This tuner can display radio text data trans-

mitted by RDS stations, such as station infor-

mation, the title of the currently broadcast

song and the name of the artist.

pThe tuner automatically memorises the

three latest radio text broadcasts received,

replacing text from the least recent recep-

tion with new text when it is received.

pWhen no radio text is received, “No Text”is

displayed.

Viewing the three latest radio text

You can display the currently received radio

text and the three most recent radio text trans-

missions.

1 Display the radio text screen.

=For details, refer to Displays radio text

screen on the previous page.

2 Press the TRK button.

Pressing the button switches the text contents

from the current radio text to the most recent

three radio text transmissions.

pIf there is no radio text data in memory, the

display will not change.

Storing and recalling radio text

You can store data from up to six radio text

transmissions in the touch panel keys “1”to

“6”.

1 Display the radio text you want to

store in memory.

=For details, refer to Viewing the three latest

radio text on this page.

2 Touch and hold any of the keys [1] to

[6] to store the displayed radio text.

The selected radio text is stored in memory.

The next time you press the same keys in the

radio text display, the stored text is recalled

from memory.

Engb

Chapter

14 Using the radio (FM)

pIf the radio text data is already stored under

all keys, the new text will overwrite the exist-

ing one.

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can move preset channels up or down.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform seek tuning.

Using advanced functions

%Touch on the “FM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

1 2 3 4

567

1Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies

2Tunes in strong signals

3Limits stations to regional program-

ming

4Searches for an RDS station by PTY in-

formation

5Receives traffic announcements

6Tunes into alternative frequencies

7Uses news programme interruption

=For details of each function, refer to sec-

tions below with the relative titles.

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies

BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-

tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies under the preset tuning keys “P1”to

“P6”and, once stored there, you can tune into

them with the touch of a key.

pStoring broadcast frequencies with BSM

may replace broadcast frequencies you

have already saved.

1 Touch on the “FM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

2 Touch [BSM].

3 Touch [Start] to begin a search.

“BSM”begins to flash. While “BSM”is flash-

ing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies

will be stored under the preset tuning keys

“P1”to “P6”in order of their signal strength.

When this is complete, “BSM”stops flashing.

#If you touch [Stop], the storage process is

cancelled.

Tuning in strong signals

Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only

those radio stations with sufficiently strong

signals for good reception.

1 Touch on the “FM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

2 Touch [Local].

3 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.

#If you touch [Off], local seek tuning is turned

off.

4 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-

sitivity.

There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.

Level: 1—2—3—4

pThe level “4”setting allows reception of only

the strongest stations, while lower settings

let you receive weaker stations.

Engb 77

Chapter

Using the radio (FM)

Limiting stations to regional

programming

When AF is used to automatically retune fre-

quencies, the regional function limits the se-

lection to stations broadcasting regional

programmes.

1 Touch on the “FM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

2 Touch [Regional].

Each touch of [Regional] turns it on or off.

pRegional programming and regional net-

works are organised differently depending

on the country (i.e., they may change ac-

cording to the time, country or broadcast

area).

pThe preset number may disappear on the

display if the tuner tunes in a regional sta-

tion that differs from the originally set sta-

tion.

pThe regional function can be turned on or

off independently for each FM band.

Searching for an RDS station by

PTY information

You can search for general types of broadcast-

ing programmes.

=For details, refer to PTY list on page 81.

1 Touch on the “FM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

2 Touch [PTY].

3 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to select a

programme type.

There are four programme types:

NEWS&INF —Popular —Classics —Others

4 Touch [Start] to begin a search.

The tuner searches for a station broadcasting

that programme type.

#If you touch [Stop], the search is cancelled.

pThe programmes of some stations may dif-

fer from that indicated by the transmitted

PTY.

pIf no station is broadcasting the type of pro-

gramme you searched for, “Not Found”is

displayed for about two seconds and then

the tuner returns to the original station.

Receiving traffic announcements

TA (traffic announcement standby) lets you re-

ceive traffic announcements automatically, no

matter what source you are listening to. TA

can be activated for both a TP station (a sta-

tion that broadcasts traffic information) or an-

other enhanced network’s TP station (a station

carrying information that cross-references TP

stations).

1 Tune in a TP station or another en-

hanced network’s TP station.

2 Touch [TA] on the “Function”menu to

turn traffic announcement standby on.

pTo turn traffic announcements standby off,

touch [TA] again.

3 Use the VOL (+/–) button or Multi-con-

trol to adjust the TA volume when a traffic

announcement begins.

The newly set volume is stored in memory and

recalled for subsequent traffic announce-

ments.

4 Touch [Cancel] while a traffic announce-

ment is being received to cancel the an-

nouncement.

The tuner returns to the original source but re-

mains in standby mode until [TA] is touched

again.

You can also cancel the announcement by

changing the source or band.

pThe system switches back to the original

source following traffic announcement re-

ception.

pOnly TP stations and other enhanced net-

works’TP stations are tuned in during seek

tuning or BSM when the TA function is on.

Engb

Chapter

14 Using the radio (FM)

Tuning into alternative frequencies

If you are listening to a broadcast and the re-

ception becomes weak or there are other pro-

blems, the navigation system will

automatically search for a different station in

the same network that is broadcasting a stron-

ger signal.

1 Touch on the “FM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

2 Touch [AF].

Each touch of [AF] turns it on or off.

pOnly RDS stations are tuned in during seek

tuning or BSM when AF is on.

pWhen you recall a preset station, the tuner

may update the preset station with a new

frequency from the station’s AF list. No pre-

set number appears on the display if the

RDS data for the station received differs

from that for the originally stored station.

pSound may be temporarily interrupted by

another programme during an AF fre-

quency search.

pAF can be turned on or off independently

for each FM band.

PI Seek operation

If the unit fails to find a suitable alternative fre-

quency, or if you are listening to a broadcast

and the reception becomes weak, the naviga-

tion system will automatically search for a dif-

ferent station with the same programming.

During the search, “PI Seek”is displayed and

the output is muted. Muting is discontinued

after completion of the PI Seek, whether or not

a different station is found.

Activating the Auto PI seek for

preset stations

When preset stations cannot be recalled, as

when travelling long distances, the unit can

be set to perform PI Seek during preset recall.

pThe default setting for Auto PI Seek is off.

=For details, refer to Switching Auto PI seek

on page 161.

Using news programme

interruption

When a news programme is broadcast from a

PTY code news station, the navigation system

can switch from any station to the news broad-

cast station. When the news programme

ends, reception of the previous programme re-

sumes.

1 Touch on the “FM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

2 Touch [News].

Each touch of [News] turns it on or off.

A news programme can be cancelled by

touching [Cancel].

You can also cancel the news programme by

changing the source or band.

Interruption icon status

When the information interruption setting is

enabled, the interruption icon is displayed.

The interruption icon display may change de-

pending on the programme reception status.

=For details of the operation, refer to Receiv-

ing traffic announcements on the previous

page.

=For details of the operations, refer to Using

news programme interruption on this page.

pThe interruption icon is displayed on all AV

source operation screens.

TRFC indicator

Indicator Meaning

Information interruption is acti-

vated, but you will not receive data

since there is none.

Information interruption is acti-

vated, and currently receiving data.

(No display) Information interruption is deacti-

vated.

Engb 79

Chapter

Using the radio (FM)

NEWS indicator

Indicator Meaning

Information interruption is acti-

vated, but you will not receive data

since there is none.

Information interruption is acti-

vated, and currently receiving data.

(No display) Information interruption is deacti-

vated.

Engb

Chapter

14 Using the radio (FM)

PTY list

General Specific Type of programme

NEWS&INF News News

Affairs Current affairs

Info General information and advice

Sport Sports

Weather Weather reports/meteorological information

Finance Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc.

Popular Pop Mus Popular music

Rock Mus Contemporary modern music

Easy Mus Easy listening music

Oth Mus Non categorised music

Jazz Jazz

Country Country music

Nat Mus National music

Oldies Oldies music, golden oldies

Folk Mus Folk music

Classics L. Class Light classical music

Classic Serious classical music

Others Educate Educational programmes

Drama All radio plays and serials

Culture National or regional culture

Science Nature, science and technology

Varied Light entertainment

Children Children’s

Social Social affairs

Religion Religion affairs or services

Phone In Phone In

Touring Travel programmes, not for announcements about traffic problems

Leisure Hobbies and recreational activities

Document Documentaries

Engb 81

Chapter

Using the radio (FM)

You can listen to the radio using this naviga-

tion system. This section describes operations

for radio (MW/LW).

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Tap [AM] on the left edge of the screen

to display the “AM”screen.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on the next page.

Reading the screen

32 4

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Signal level indicator

3Frequency indicator

Shows the current frequency.

4Current time

5Preset number indicator

Shows what preset item has been selected.

Engb

Chapter

15 Using the radio (AM)

Using the touch panel keys

1Performs manual tuning

To tune manually, touch [o]or[p] briefly.

The frequencies move up or down one step at

a time.

Performs seek tuning

To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]

or [p] for about one second and then re-

lease. The tuner will scan frequencies until a

broadcast strong enough for good reception

is found.

pYou can cancel seek tuning by touching

either [o]or[p] briefly.

pIf you keep holding [o]or[p], you

can skip broadcasting frequencies.

Seek tuning will start at the time you re-

lease the keys.

2Selects a preset channel

The keys can be used to switch preset chan-

nels.

Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-

play the preset channel you want to select,

and tap the channel.

pThe lower keys and the upper keys ap-

pear only when the preset channel is se-

lected.

3Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

4Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on the next page.

5Switches between the AV operation

screen and the preset list display

You can switch the screen display according

to your preference.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Switching between the AV operation

screen and the list screen on page 72.

Storing and recalling broadcast

frequencies

With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys

(“P1”to “P6”), you can easily store up to six

broadcast frequencies for later recall (also

with the tap of a key).

1 Select a frequency that you want to

store in memory.

Engb 83

Chapter

Using the radio (AM)

2 Display the preset channel list.

=For details, refer to Switches between the

AV operation screen and the preset list

display on the previous page.

3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]

to [P6].

Preset list display

Preset tuning keys

The selected radio station has been stored in

memory.

The next time you tap the same preset tuning

key “P1”to “P6”, the radio station frequencies

are recalled from memory.

=For details of the list operations, refer to Op-

erating list screens (e.g. iPod list screen) on

page 72.

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can move preset channels up or down.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform seek tuning.

Using advanced functions

%Touch on the “AM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

1 2

1Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies

2Tunes in strong signals

=For details of each function, refer to sec-

tions below with the relative titles.

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies

BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-

tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies under the preset tuning keys “P1”to

“P6”and, once stored there, you can tune into

them with the touch of a key.

pStoring broadcast frequencies with BSM

may replace broadcast frequencies you

have already saved.

1 Touch on the “AM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

2 Touch [BSM].

3 Touch [Start] to begin a search.

“BSM”begins to flash. While “BSM”is flash-

ing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies

will be stored under the preset tuning keys

“P1”to “P6”in order of their signal strength.

When this is complete, “BSM”stops flashing.

#If you touch [Stop], the storage process is

cancelled.

Tuning in strong signals

Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only

those radio stations with sufficiently strong

signals for good reception.

Engb

Chapter

15 Using the radio (AM)

1 Touch on the “AM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

2 Touch [Local].

3 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.

#If you touch [Off], local seek tuning is turned

off.

4 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-

sitivity.

There are two levels of sensitivity for MW/LW.

Level: 1—2

pThe level “2”setting allows reception of only

the strongest stations, while lower settings

let you receive weaker stations.

Engb 85

Chapter

Using the radio (AM)

You can play a normal music CD using the

built-in drive of the navigation system. This

section describes how.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Insert the disc you want to play into

disc-loading slot.

Playback starts from the first track of the CD.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a

disc on page 15.

pIf the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the

left edge of the screen.

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 72.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the disc.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on the next page.

Reading the screen

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition.

Scanning tracks of a CD

Indicator Meaning

Cancels the scan play.

Plays the beginning of each

track in the current repeat play

range for about 10 seconds.

Playing tracks in random order

Indicator Meaning

Does not play tracks in random

order.

Plays all tracks in the current

disc in random order.

Setting a repeat play range

Indicator Meaning

Repeats the current disc.

Repeats just the current track.

3Current track information

!:Artist name

Shows the artist name of the track cur-

rently playing (when available).

!:Album title

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent track (when available).

!:Track title

Shows the title of the track currently

playing (when available).

!Play time

Shows the elapsed playing time within

the current track.

p“-------”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

4Current time

5Track information

!Track number indicator

Shows the track number and the total

number of tracks in the current repeat

range.

!Track title indicator

Engb

Chapter

16 Playing audio CDs

Using the touch panel keys

123

1Scans tracks of a CD

Scan play is performed by touching only one

key.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Scans tracks of a CD on the next page.

2Plays tracks in random order

All of the tracks in the disc can be played at

random by touching only one key.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Plays tracks in random order on the

next page.

3Sets a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by

touching only one key.

=For details, refer to Changes the repeat

range on the next page.

4Selects a track to play

Scrolling the keys up or down displays tracks,

and tapping a track starts playback.

Tapping the lower key during random play-

back skips to the next track. Tapping the

upper key jumps to the start of the current

track.

5Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

6Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on the next page.

7Playback and Pause

Touching [f] switches between playback

and pause.

8Selects a track from the list

Touching the key displays the list which lets

you see the list of track titles on a disc. You

can play a track on the list by tapping it.

p“-------”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

=For details, refer to Operating list screens

(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 72.

9Switches the media file type played

=For details, refer to Switches the

media file type played on page 92.

Engb 87

Chapter

Playing audio CDs

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can skip tracks forward or backward.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Using advanced functions

%Touch on the “CD”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

1 2 3 4

1Changes the repeat range

Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting

as follows:

!Disc: Repeats the current disc.

!Track: Repeats just the current track.

pIf you perform track search or fast for-

ward or reverse, track repeat playback is

automatically cancelled.

2Plays tracks in random order

Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.

pIf you turn the random play on when the

repeat play range is set to “Track”, the

repeat play range changes to “Disc”

automatically.

3Scans tracks of a CD

Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off. Scan

play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of

each track on the CD. When you find the

track you want, touch [Scan] to turn scan

play off.

pAfter scanning is finished, normal play-

back of the tracks will begin again.

pIf you turn the scan play on when the re-

peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-

peat play range changes to “Disc”

automatically.

4Uses “Sound Retriever”function

“Sound Retriever”function automatically

enhances compressed audio and restores

rich sound.

Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes

the setting as follows:

!MODE 1: Activates “Sound Retriever”

function.

!MODE 2: Activates “Sound Retriever”

function.

!Off: Deactivates “Sound Retriever”

function.

p“MODE 2”has a stronger effect than

“MODE 1”and is more effective when

playing back highly compressed audio

data.

Engb

Chapter

16 Playing audio CDs

You can play a disc that contains compressed

audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-

gation system. This section describes these

operations.

pIn the following description, the MP3,

WMA, AAC files are collectively referred to

as “Compressed audio file”.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Insert the disc you want to play into

disc-loading slot.

Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a

disc on page 15.

pIf the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the

left edge of the screen.

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 72.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the disc.

=For details concerning operations, refer to

Using the touch panel keys on page 91.

Reading the screen

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition.

Scanning folders and files

Indicator Meaning

Cancels the scan play.

Plays the first audio files of each

folder for about 10 seconds

when the repeat range is set to

“Disc”.

Plays the beginning of each

audio file in the current folder

for about 10 seconds when the

repeat range is set to “Folder”.

Playing files in random order

Indicator Meaning

Does not play files in random

order.

Plays all audio files in the cur-

rent repeat play range in ran-

dom order.

Setting a repeat play range

Indicator Meaning

Repeats all compressed audio

files.

Repeats just the current file.

Repeats the current folder.

3Current file information

!:Folder name

Shows the folder name currently play-

ing.

!:Artist name

Shows the artist name currently playing

(when available).

!:Album title

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent file (when available).

!:Track title

Shows the title of the track currently

playing (when available).

pIf the title of a track is not available,

the file name appears.

!Play time

Shows the elapsed playing time within

the current file.

Engb 89

Chapter

Playing music files on ROM

p“-------”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

4Current time

5File information

!File number indicator

!File name indicator

!File type indicator

Shows the type of audio files.

Engb

Chapter

17 Playing music files on ROM

Using the touch panel keys

123

1Scans folders and files

Scan play is performed by touching only one

key.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Scans folders and files on the next

page.

2Plays files in random order

The files in the current repeat play range can

be played at random by touching only one key.

pIf the disc contains a mixture of various

media file types, all tracks or files within

the current part (“CD”or “ROM”) are

played randomly.

=For details, refer to Plays files in ran-

dom order on the next page.

3Sets a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by

touching only one key.

=For details, refer to Changes the repeat

range on the next page.

4Selects a file to play

Scrolling the keys up or down displays files,

and tapping a file starts playback.

Tapping the lower key during random play-

back skips to the next file. Tapping the upper

key jumps to the start of the current file.

5Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

6Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on the next page.

7Playback and Pause

Touching [f] switches between playback

and pause.

8Selects a file from the list

Touching the key displays the list which lets

you see the list of track titles or folder names

on a disc.

pIf the title of a track is not available, the

file name appears.

Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.

You can play a file on the list by tapping it.

Engb 91

Chapter

Playing music files on ROM

=For details, refer to Operating list screens

(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 72.

Touching displays the content of the upper

folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder

is listed, cannot be used.

9Switches the media file type played

When playing a disc containing a mixture of

various media file types, you can switch be-

tween media file types to play.

Tap the key repeatedly to switch between the

following media file types:

CD (audio data (CD-DA)) —ROM (com-

pressed audio file) —DivX (DivX video

files)

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can skip files forward or backward.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Using advanced functions

%Touch on the “ROM”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

1 2 3 4

1Changes the repeat range

Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting

as follows:

!Disc: Repeats all compressed audio

files.

!Track: Repeats just the current file.

!Folder: Repeats the current folder.

pIf you select another folder during repeat

play, the repeat play range changes to

“Disc”.

pIf you perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward during “Track”, the repeat play

range changes to “Folder”.

pWhen “Folder”is selected, it is not pos-

sible to playback a subfolder of that

folder.

pWhen playing discs with compressed

audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-

peat play is performed within the cur-

rently playing data session even if “Disc”

is selected.

2Plays files in random order

Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.

When the random play is turned on, the

files in the current repeat play range are

randomly played.

pIf you turn the random play on when the

repeat play range is set to “Track”, the

repeat play range changes to “Folder”

automatically.

3Scans folders and files

Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds

of each file. Scan play is performed in the

current repeat play range.

Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off.

When you find the file you want, touch

[Scan] to turn the scan play off.

pAfter completion of file or folder scan-

ning, normal playback of the files will

begin again.

pIf you turn the scan play on when the re-

peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-

peat play range changes to “Folder”

automatically.

pIf you turn the scan play on while the re-

peat play range is set to “Disc”, scan

play is performed for only the first file of

each folder.

4Uses “Sound Retriever”function

“Sound Retriever”function automatically

enhances compressed audio and restores

rich sound.

Engb

Chapter

17 Playing music files on ROM

Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes

the setting as follows:

!MODE 1: Activates “Sound Retriever”

function.

!MODE 2: Activates “Sound Retriever”

function.

!Off: Deactivates “Sound Retriever”

function.

p“MODE 2”has a stronger effect than

“MODE 1”and is more effective when

playing back highly compressed audio

data.

Engb 93

Chapter

Playing music files on ROM

You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in

drive of the navigation system. This section de-

scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Insert the disc you want to play into

disc-loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a

disc on page 15.

pIf the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the

left edge of the screen.

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 72.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the disc.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on the next page.

Reading the screen

1 5 6 72 3 4

1Title number indicator

Shows the title number currently playing.

2Audio track indicator

Shows the audio track number and audio lan-

guage currently selected.

3Chapter number indicator

Shows the chapter number currently playing.

4Audio channel indicator

Shows the current audio channel type, such

as “Mch”(Multi-channel).

5Subtitle number indicator

Shows the subtitle number currently selected.

6Subtitle language indicator

Shows the subtitle language currently se-

lected.

7Viewing angle indicator

Shows what viewing angle has been selected.

8Current time

9Digital sound format indicator

Shows which digital sound format (surround

sound format) has been selected.

aPlay time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current title.

bSource icon

Shows which source has been selected.

Engb

Chapter

18 Playing a DVD-Video

Using the touch panel keys

Playback screen (page 1)

654321

Playback screen (page 2) Playback screen (page 3)

dc jih

pWith some discs, the icon 9may be dis-

played, meaning that the operation is inva-

lid.

1Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on page 98.

2Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

3Switches the display

Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the

information plate as follows:

Disc information display —Repeat range and

L/R select display

4Switches to the next page of touch panel

keys

5Displays the DVD menu keypad

=For details, refer to Using DVD menu by

touch panel keys on page 97.

6Playback and Pause

Touching [f] switches between playback

and pause.

7Hides the touch panel keys and informa-

tion of the current video

Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.

pIf you want to display the touch panel

keys and information of the current

video again, touch anywhere on the LCD

screen.

Engb 95

Chapter

Playing a DVD-Video

8Skips forward or backward

Touching [p] skips to the start of the next

chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the

start of the current chapter. Touching it twice

quickly will skip to the previous chapter.

9Stops playback

When [g] is touched once to stop playback,

playback can be resumed from the stopped

position. When [g] is touched two times to

stop playback, playback returns to the begin-

ning.

aDisplays the DVD menu

You can display the menu by touching [Menu]

or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-

ing either of these keys again lets you start

playback from the location selected from the

menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-

vided with the disc.

bResumes playback (Bookmark)

=For details, refer to Resuming playback

(Bookmark) on this page.

cFrame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion

playback)

=For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-

back on page 98.

=For details, refer to Slow motion playback

on page 98.

dFast reverse or forward

Touch and hold [m]or[n] to perform fast

reverse or forward.

If you keep touching [m]or[n] for five

seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues

even if you release either of these keys. To re-

sume playback at a desired point, touch

[f] or opposite key of [m]or[n] which

you touched.

eSkips the title forward or backward

Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.

Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous

title.

fPerforms an operation (such as resuming)

that is stored on the disc

When using a DVD that has a point recorded

that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-

turns to the specified point and begins play-

back from that point.

gSearches for a desired scene and starts

playback from a specified time

=For details, refer to Searching for a speci-

fic scene and starting playback from a

specified time on the next page.

hChanges the audio track (Multi-audio)

Each touch of [Audio] switches between

audio tracks recorded in the disc.

pDTS audio format cannot be output, so

select an audio track other than DTS

audio format.

pDisplay indications such as MPEG-A

and Mch describe the audio track re-

corded on the DVD. This indication may

not be the same as the actual sound

currently output from the navigation sys-

tem.

iChanges the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)

Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the

subtitle languages recorded on the disc.

jChanges the viewing angle (Multi-angle)

Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-

ing angles.

pDuring playback of a scene shot from

multiple angles, the angle icon is

displayed. Turn the angle icon display

on or off using the “DVD/DivX® Setup”

menu.

=For details, refer to Setting the angle icon

display on page 104.

Resuming playback (Bookmark)

The Bookmark function lets you resume play-

back from a selected scene the next time the

disc is loaded.

%Touch [BookM.].

Engb

Chapter

18 Playing a DVD-Video

You can bookmark one point for each of up to

five discs. If you try to memorise another point

for the same disc, the older bookmark will be

overwritten by the newer one.

pTo clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and

hold [BookM.].

Searching for a specific scene

and starting playback from a

specified time

You can search for the scene you want by spe-

cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.

pChapter search and time search are not

available when disc playback has been

stopped.

1 Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]

(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).

2 Touch the keys to input the target num-

ber or time and then touch [Enter].

For titles, chapters

!To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.

!To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter]in

order.

For time (time search)

!To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],

[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.

!To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],

[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.

!To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch

[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.

pTo cancel an input number, touch [Clear].

To cancel the input numbers, touch and

hold [Clear].

Direct number search

You can use this function when you need to

enter a numerical command during DVD play-

back.

1 Touch [Search].

2 Touch [10Key].

3 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired

number.

4 While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

Operating the DVD menu

You can operate the DVD menu by touching

the menu item on the screen directly.

pThis function can be used when the

key is displayed on the lower right corner of

the LCD screen.

pThis function may not work properly with

some DVD disc content. In that case, use

touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.

pIf you touch the screen while is dis-

played, the touch panel keys will not be dis-

played.

1 Touch the screen to display the touch

panel keys.

2 Touch [Top Menu] or [Menu] to display

touch panel keys to operate the DVD

menu.

3 Touch the desired menu item.

#If you touch , the touch panel keys for

selecting the menu item are displayed.

Using DVD menu by touch

panel keys

If items on the DVD menu appear, the touch

panel keys may overlay them. If so, select an

item using those touch panel keys.

Engb 97

Chapter

Playing a DVD-Video

1 Touch [a], [b], [c]or[d] to select the

desired menu item.

pIf the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-

tion disappear, touching anywhere on the

screen, then touch . The touch panel

keys are displayed again.

2 Touch [Enter].

Playback starts from the selected menu item.

The way to display the menu differs depending

on the disc.

#If you touch [Position], the display position of

touch panel keys is changed each time you touch

it.

#If you touch [Hide], the touch panel keys dis-

appear and the icon is displayed. You can

select a menu item by touching it.

Frame-by-frame playback

This lets you move ahead one frame at a time

during pause.

%Touch [r] during pause.

Each time you touch [r], you move ahead

one frame.

pTo return to normal playback, touch [f].

pWith some discs, images may be unclear

during frame-by-frame playback.

Slow motion playback

This lets you slow down playback speed.

1 Touch and hold [r] until is dis-

played during playback.

The icon is displayed, and forward slow

motion playback begins.

pTo return to normal playback, touch [f].

2 Touch [q]or[r] to adjust playback

speed during slow motion playback.

Each time you touch [q]or[r] it changes

the speed in four steps in the following order:

1/16 f1/8 f1/4 f1/2

pThere is no sound during slow motion play-

back.

pWith some discs, images may be unclear

during slow motion playback.

pReversed slow motion playback is not possi-

ble.

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can skip chapters forward or backward.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Using advanced functions

%Touch on the “DVD-V”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

1 2 3

1Changes the repeat range

Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting

as follows:

!Disc: Plays throughout the current disc.

!Chapter: Repeats just the current chap-

ter.

!Title: Repeats just the current title.

Engb

Chapter

18 Playing a DVD-Video

pIf you perform chapter (title) search, fast

forward, fast reverse or slow motion

playback, the repeat play range changes

to “Disc”.

pThis function is not available when disc

playback has been stopped.

2Selects audio output

When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM

audio, you can switch the audio output.

Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-

sired audio output appears on the display.

Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!L+R: Left and right

!L: Left

!R: Right

!Mix: Mixing left and right

pThis function is not available when disc

playback has been stopped.

3DVD setup adjustments

=For details, refer to Displaying DVD/

DivX® Setup menu on page 104.

Engb 99

Chapter

Playing a DVD-Video

You can play a DivX disc using the built-in

drive of the navigation system. This section de-

scribes those operations.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Insert the disc you want to play into

disc-loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a

disc on page 15.

pIf the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the

left edge of the screen.

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 72.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the disc.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on the next page.

Reading the screen

1562 3 4 7

1Folder number indicator

Shows the folder number currently playing.

2Audio track indicator

Shows the audio track number currently se-

lected.

3File number indicator

Shows the file number currently playing.

4Audio channel indicator

Shows the current audio channel type, such

as “Mch”(Multi-channel).

5Subtitle number indicator

Shows the subtitle number currently selected.

6Repeat range indicator

Shows which repeat range has been selected.

=For details, refer to Changes the repeat

range on page 103.

7Current time

8Digital sound format indicator

Shows the digital sound format (surround

sound format) currently selected.

9Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current file.

aSource icon

Shows which source has been selected.

Engb

100

Chapter

19 Playing a DivX video

Using the touch panel keys

Playback screen (page 1)

65432

Playback screen (page 2)

pWith some discs, the icon 9may be dis-

played, meaning that the operation is inva-

lid.

1Switches the media file type played

When playing a disc containing a mixture of

various media file types, you can switch be-

tween media file types to play.

Tap the key repeatedly to switch between the

following media file types:

CD (audio data (CD-DA)) —ROM (com-

pressed audio file) —DivX (DivX video files)

2Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on page 103.

3Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

4Switches the information

Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-

formation panel as follows:

Disc information display —Current folder

name display —Current file name display

5Switches to the next page of touch panel

keys

6Playback and Pause

Touching [f] switches between playback

and pause.

7Hides the touch panel keys and informa-

tion of the current video

Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.

Engb 101

Chapter

Playing a DivX video

pIf you want to display the touch panel

keys and information of the current

video again, touch anywhere on the LCD

screen.

8Skips forward or backward

Touching [p] skips to the start of the next

file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of

the current file. Touching it twice quickly will

skip to the previous file.

9Stops playback

When [g] is touched once to stop playback,

playback can be resumed from the stopped

position. When [g] is touched two times to

stop playback, playback returns to the begin-

ning.

aSelects a file from the list

Touching the key displays the list which lets

you find file names or folder names on a disc.

pA dash (–) is displayed if there is no cor-

responding information.

Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.

You can play a file on the list by tapping it.

=For details, refer to Operating list screens

(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 72.

The contents of the folder in which the cur-

rently playing file is located are displayed.

Touching displays the content of the upper

folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder

is listed, cannot be used.

bFrame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion

playback)

=For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-

back on this page.

=For details, refer to Slow motion playback

on this page.

cFast reverse or forward

Touch and hold [m]or[n] to perform fast

reverse or forward.

If you keep touching [m]or[n] for five

seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues

even if you release either of these keys. To re-

sume playback at a desired point, touch

[f] or opposite key of [m]or[n] which

you touched.

dChanges the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)

Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the

subtitle languages recorded on the disc.

eChanges audio tracks (Multi-audio)

Each touch of [Audio] switches between

audio tracks.

fSearches for a desired scene and starts

playback from a specified time

=For details, refer to Starting playback

from a specified time on the next page.

Frame-by-frame playback

This lets you move ahead one frame at a time

during pause.

%Touch [r] during pause.

Each time you touch [r], you move ahead

one frame.

pTo return to normal playback, touch [f].

pWith some discs, images may be unclear

during frame-by-frame playback.

Slow motion playback

This lets you slow down playback speed.

%Touch and hold [r] until is dis-

played during playback.

The icon is displayed, and forward slow

motion playback begins.

pTo return to normal playback, touch [n]

or [m], etc.

pThere is no sound during slow motion play-

back.

pWith some discs, images may be unclear

during slow motion playback.

pReversed slow motion playback is not possi-

ble.

Engb

102

Chapter

19 Playing a DivX video

Starting playback from a

specified time

You can search for a desired scene by specify-

ing the time.

pTime search are not possible when disc

playback has been stopped.

1 Touch [Search].

2 Touch the keys to input the target num-

ber or time and then touch [Enter].

!To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],

[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.

!To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],

[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.

!To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch

[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.

pTo cancel an input number, touch [Clear].

To cancel the input numbers, touch and

hold [Clear].

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can skip files forward or backward.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Using advanced functions

%Touch on the “DivX”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

1 2

1Changes the repeat range

Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting

as follows:

!Disc: Plays throughout the current disc.

!File: Repeats just the current file.

!Folder: Repeats just the current folder.

pIf you select another folder during repeat

play, the repeat play range changes to

“Disc”.

pIf you perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward during “File”, the repeat play range

changes to “Folder”.

pWhen “Folder”is selected, it is not pos-

sible to playback a subfolder of that

folder.

pWhen playing discs with compressed

audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-

peat play is performed within DivX vi-

deos even if “Disc”is selected.

2DVD setup adjustments

=For details, refer to Displaying DVD/

DivX® Setup menu on the next

page.

Engb 103

Chapter

Playing a DivX video

This chapter describes how to configure the

DVD-Video/DivX player.

Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup

1 Play the disc that contains DVD-Video

or DivX.

2 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

3 Touch .

The “Function”menu appears.

4 Touch [DVD/DivX® Setup].

The “DVD/DivX® Setup”screen appears.

5 Touch the desired function.

Setting the top-priority

languages

You can assign the top-priority language to the

top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial

playback. If the selected language is recorded

on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-

played or output in that language.

1 Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®

Setup menu on this page.

2 Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-

guage] or [Menu Language].

Each language menu is displayed and the cur-

rently set language is selected.

3 Touch the desired language.

When you select “Others”, a language code

input display is shown. Input the four-digit

code of the desired language then touch

[Enter].

=For details, refer to Language code chart for

DVDs on page 107.

pIf the selected language is not recorded on

the disc, the default language specified on

the disc is output and displayed.

pYou can also switch the subtitle and audio

language by touching [S.Title]or[Audio]

during playback.

Even if you touch [S.Title]or[Audio]to

switch the subtitle or audio language, this

setting will not change.

Setting the angle icon display

You can set the angle icon to display in

scenes where the angle can be switched.

1 Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®

Setup menu on this page.

2 Touch [Multi Angle].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!On (default):

Displays the angle icon in scenes where the

angle can be switched.

!Off:

Hides the angle icon.

Engb

104

Chapter

20 DVD-Video or DivX setup

Setting the aspect ratio

There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen

display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)

of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect

of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a

TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio

suitable for your rear display. (We recommend

use of this function only when you want to fit it

to the rear display.)

pWhen using a regular display, select either

“Letter Box”or “Panscan”. Selecting

“16:9”may result in an unnatural image.

1 Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®

Setup menu on the previous page.

2 Touch [TV Aspect].

Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting

as follows:

!16:9: Wide screen image (16:9) is displayed

as it is (initial setting).

!Letter Box: The image is in the shape of a

letter box with black bands at the top and

bottom of the screen.

!Panscan: The image is cut short at the right

and left of the screen.

pWhen playing discs that do not have a pan-

scan system, the disc is played back with

“Letter Box”even if you select “Panscan”

setting. Confirm whether the disc package

bears the mark.

pSome discs do not enable changing of the

TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-

structions.

Setting the parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental

lock to set restrictions so that children cannot

watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You

can set the parental lock level in steps as de-

sired.

pWhen you set a parental lock level and then

play a disc featuring parental lock, code

number input indications may be dis-

played. In this case, playback will begin

when the correct code number is input.

Setting the code number and level

When you first use this function, register your

code number. If you do not register a code

number, parental lock will not operate.

1 Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®

Setup menu on the previous page.

2 Touch [Parental Level].

3 Touch [0] to [9] to input a four-digit

code number.

4 While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

The code number is registered, and you can

now set the level.

5 Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-

sired level.

The parental lock level is set.

!Level 8: Playback of the entire disc is possi-

ble (initial setting).

!Level 7 to Level 2: Playback of discs for

children and non-adult oriented discs is

possible.

!Level 1: Only playback of discs for children

is possible.

pIf you want to change the parental level al-

ready set, enter the registered code number

and then select the parental level.

pWe recommend that you keep a record of

your code number in case you forget it.

pThe parental lock level is recorded on the

disc. You can confirm it by looking at the

disc package, the included literature or the

disc itself. You cannot use parental lock

with discs that do not feature a recorded

parental lock level.

pWith some discs, parental lock operates to

skip certain scenes only, after which normal

playback resumes. For details, refer to the

disc’s instructions.

Engb 105

Chapter

DVD-Video or DivX setup

pIf you forget the registered code number,

touch 10 times on the number input

screen. The registered code number is can-

celled, letting you register a new one.

Setting the auto play

When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,

this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-

cally and start playback from the first chapter

of the first title.

pThis function is available for DVD-Video.

pSome DVDs may not operate properly. If

this function is not fully operable, turn this

function off and start playback.

1 Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®

Setup menu on page 104.

2 Touch [Auto Play].

Each touch of [Auto Play] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!Off (default):

Deactivates the auto play function.

!On:

Activates the auto play function.

pWhen “Auto Play”is set to “On”, the repeat

range is automatically set to “Disc”.

Setting the subtitle file for

DivX

You can select whether to display DivX exter-

nal subtitles or not.

pIf no DivX external subtitle files exist, the

original DivX subtitles are displayed even

when “Custom”is selected.

1 Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®

Setup menu on page 104.

2 Touch [Subtitle File].

Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting

between “Original”and “Custom”.

pUp to 42 characters can be displayed on

one line. If more than 42 characters are set,

the line breaks and the characters are dis-

played on the next line.

pUp to 126 characters can be displayed on

one screen. If more than 126 characters are

set, the excess characters will not be dis-

played.

pThe DivX subtitles will be displayed even

when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-

responding subtitle files exist.

pUp to three subtitle lines can be displayed

at once.

Engb

106

Chapter

20 DVD-Video or DivX setup

Language code chart for DVDs

Two-letter

code, input

code

Language

Two-letter

code, input

code

Language

Two-letter

code, input

code

Language

aa, 0101 Afar ia, 0901 Interlingua rn, 1814 Rundi

ab, 0102 Abkhazian ie, 0905 Interlingue ro, 1815 Romanian

af, 0106 Afrikaans ik, 0911 Inupiaq ru, 1821 Russian

am, 0113 Amharic in, 0914 Indonesian rw, 1823 Kinyarwanda

ar, 0118 Arabic is, 0919 Icelandic sa, 1901 Sanskrit

as, 0119 Assamese it, 0920 Italian sd, 1904 Sindhi

ay, 0125 Aymara ja, 1001 Japanese sg, 1907 Sango

az, 0126 Azerbaijani ji, 1009 Yiddish sh, 1908 Serbo-Croatian

ba, 0201 Bashkir jw, 1023 Javanese si, 1909 Sinhala

be, 0205 Belarusian ka, 1101 Georgian sk, 1911 Slovak

bg, 0207 Bulgarian kk, 1111 Kazakh sl, 1912 Slovenian

bh, 0208 Bihari kl, 1112 Kalaallisut sm, 1913 Samoan

bi, 0209 Bislama km, 1113 Central Khmer sn, 1914 Shona

bn, 0214 Bengali kn, 1114 Kannada so, 1915 Somali

bo, 0215 Tibetan ko, 1115 Korean sq, 1917 Albanian

br, 0218 Breton ks, 1119 Kashmiri sr, 1918 Serbian

ca, 0301 Catalan ku, 1121 Kurdish ss, 1919 Swati

co, 0315 Corsican ky, 1125 Kirghiz; Kyrgyz st, 1920 Sotho, Southern

cs, 0319 Czech la, 1201 Latin su, 1921 Sundanese

cy, 0325 Welsh ln, 1214 Lingala sv, 1922 Swedish

da, 0401 Danish lo, 1215 Lao sw, 1923 Swahili

de, 0405 German lt, 1220 Lithuanian ta, 2001 Tamil

dz, 0426 Dzongkha lv, 1222 Latvian te, 2005 Telugu

ee, 0505 Ewe mg, 1307 Malagasy tg, 2007 Tajik

el, 0512 Greek mi, 1309 Maori th, 2008 Thai

en, 0514 English mk, 1311 Macedonian ti, 2009 Tigrinya

eo, 0515 Esperanto ml, 1312 Malayalam tk, 2011 Turkmen

es, 0519 Spanish mn, 1314 Mongolian tl, 2012 Tagalog

et, 0520 Estonian mo, 1315 Moldavian tn, 2014 Tswana

eu, 0521 Basque mr, 1318 Marathi to, 2015 Tonga

fa, 0601 Persian ms, 1319 Malay tr, 2018 Turkish

fi, 0609 Finnish mt, 1320 Maltese ts, 2019 Tsonga

fj, 0610 Fijian my, 1325 Burmese tt, 2020 Tatar

fo, 0615 Faroese na, 1401 Nauru tw, 2023 Twi

fr, 0618 French ne, 1405 Nepali uk, 2111 Ukrainian

fy, 0625 Western Frisian nl, 1412 Dutch; Flemish ur, 2118 Urdu

ga, 0701 Irish no, 1415 Norwegian uz, 2126 Uzbek

gd, 0704 Gaelic oc, 1503 Occitan vi, 2209 Vietnamese

gl, 0712 Galician om, 1513 Oromo vo, 2215 Volapuk

gn, 0714 Guarani or, 1518 Oriya wo, 2315 Wolof

gu, 0721 Gujarati pa, 1601 Panjabi; Punjabi xh, 2408 Xhosa

ha, 0801 Hausa pl, 1612 Polish yo, 2515 Yoruba

hi, 0809 Hindi ps, 1619 Pushto; Pashto zh, 2608 Chinese

hr, 0818 Croatian pt, 1620 Portuguese zu, 2621 Zulu

hu, 0821 Hungarian qu, 1721 Quechua

hy, 0825 Armenian rm, 1813 Romansh

Engb 107

Chapter

DVD-Video or DivX setup

You can play the compressed audio files

stored in the external storage device (USB,

SD).

pIn the following description, the SD mem-

ory card and USB memory device are col-

lectively referred to as the “external storage

device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB

memory device only, it is referred to as the

“USB storage device”.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD

card slot or plug the USB storage device

into the USB connector.

=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-

rage device on page 20.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an

SD memory card on page 16.

pPlayback is performed in order of folder

numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-

tain no playable files. If there are no play-

able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback

starts from folder 02.

3 Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of

the screen to display the “USB”or “SD”

screen.

4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the external storage device

(USB, SD).

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys (Music)on page 110.

Reading the screen

pThis unit may not achieve optimum perfor-

mance with some external storage devices.

pYou can playback the files on a USB sto-

rage device compliant with Mass Storage

Class. For details about the USB Class,

refer to the manual supplied with the USB

storage device.

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition.

Scanning folders and files

Indicator Meaning

Cancels the scan play.

Plays the first audio files of each

folder for about 10 seconds

when the repeat range is set to

“Media”.

Plays the beginning of each

audio file in the current folder

for about 10 seconds when the

repeat range is set to “Folder”.

Playing files in random order

Indicator Meaning

Does not play files in random

order.

Plays all audio files in the cur-

rent repeat play range in ran-

dom order.

Engb

108

Chapter

21 Playing music files (from USB or SD)

Setting a repeat play range

Indicator Meaning

Repeats all compressed audio

files in the selected external sto-

rage device (USB, SD).

Repeats just the current file.

Repeats the current folder.

3Current file information

!:Folder name

Shows the folder name currently play-

ing.

!:Artist name

Shows the artist name currently playing

(when available).

!:Album title

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent file (when available).

!:Track title

Shows the title of the track currently

playing (when available).

pIf the title of a track is not available,

the file name appears.

!Play time

Shows the elapsed playing time within

the current file.

p“-------”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

4Current time

5File information

!File number indicator

!File name indicator

!File type indicator

Shows the type of audio files.

Engb 109

Chapter

Playing music files (from USB or SD)

Using the touch panel keys (Music)

1Scans folders and files

Scan play is performed by touching only one

key.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Scans folders and files on the next

page.

2Plays files in random order

The files in the current repeat play range can

be played at random by touching only one key.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Plays files in random order on the

next page.

3Sets a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by

touching only one key.

=For details, refer to Changes the repeat

range on the next page.

4Selects a file to play

Scrolling the keys up or down displays files,

and tapping a file starts playback.

Tapping the lower key during random play-

back skips to the next file. Tapping the upper

key jumps to the start of the current file.

5Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

6Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on the next page.

7Playback and Pause

Touching [f] switches between playback

and pause.

8Selects a file from the list

Touching the key displays the list which lets

you find track titles or folder names on an ex-

ternal storage device (USB, SD).

Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.

You can play a file on the list by tapping it.

=For details, refer to Operating list screens

(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 72.

Touching displays the content of the upper

folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder

is listed, cannot be used.

Engb

110

Chapter

21 Playing music files (from USB or SD)

9Switches the operation screen

Tapping this key switches between the screen

to operate music files and the screen to oper-

ate video files. This touch panel key is avail-

able only when there are both audio and video

files in the external storage device (USB,

SD).

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can skip files forward or backward.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Using advanced functions

%Touch on the “USB”or “SD”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

123

1Changes the repeat range

Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting

as follows:

!Media: Repeats all compressed audio

files in the selected external storage de-

vice (USB, SD).

!Track: Repeats just the current file.

!Folder: Repeats the current folder.

pIf you skip the file forward or backward

when the repeat play range in “Track”,

the repeat play range changes to

“Folder”.

2Plays files in random order

Random play lets you playback files in ran-

dom order within the current repeat range.

Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.

pIf you turn the random play on when the

repeat play range is set to “Track”, the

repeat play range changes to “Folder”

automatically.

3Scans folders and files

Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds

of each file. Scan play is performed in the

current repeat play range.

Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off.

When you find the file you want, touch

[Scan] to turn the scan play off.

pAfter all files or folders scanning are fin-

ished, normal playback will begin again.

pIf you turn the scan play on when the re-

peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-

peat play range changes to “Folder”

automatically.

Engb 111

Chapter

Playing music files (from USB or SD)

You can play the video files stored in the exter-

nal storage device (USB, SD).

pIn the following description, the SD mem-

ory card and USB memory device are col-

lectively referred to as the “external storage

device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB

memory device only, it is referred to as the

“USB storage device”.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD

card slot or plug the USB storage device

into the USB connector.

=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-

rage device on page 20.

=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an

SD memory card on page 16.

pPlayback is performed in order of folder

numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-

tain no playable files. If there are no play-

able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback

starts from folder 02.

3 Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of

the screen to display the “USB”or “SD”

screen.

4 Touch the screen to display the touch

panel keys.

5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the external storage device

(USB, SD).

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys (Video)on the next page.

Reading the screen

41 2 3 5

pThis unit may not achieve optimum perfor-

mance with some external storage devices.

pYou can playback the files on a USB sto-

rage device compliant with Mass Storage

Class. For details about the USB Class,

refer to the manual supplied with the USB

storage device.

1Folder number indicator

2File number indicator

3Current folder name indicator

Shows the folder name currently playing.

4File name indicator

Shows the file name currently playing.

5Current time

6File type indicator

Shows the type of audio file currently playing.

7Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within the

current file.

8Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

Engb

112

Chapter

22 Playing video files (from USB or SD)

Using the touch panel keys (Video)

342

1Switches the operation screen

Tapping this key switches between the screen

to operate music files and the screen to oper-

ate video files. This touch panel key is avail-

able only when there are both audio and video

files in the external storage device (USB, SD).

2Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on the next page.

3Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

4Searches for a desired scene and starts

playback from a specified time

=For details, refer to Searching for a speci-

fic scene and starting playback from a

specified time on the next page.

5Playback and Pause

Touching [f] switches between playback

and pause.

6Hides the touch panel keys and informa-

tion of the current video

Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.

pIf you want to display the touch panel

keys and information of the current

video again, touch anywhere on the LCD

screen.

7Skips forward or backward

Touching [p] skips to the start of the next

file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of

the current file. Touching it twice quickly will

skip to the previous file.

Fast reverse or forward

Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast reverse

or fast forward.

pThere is no sound on fast reverse or for-

ward.

8Selects a file from the list

You can select and play the title you want from

the list.

=For details, refer to Operating list screens

(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 72.

The contents of the folder in which the cur-

rently playing file is located are displayed.

Touching displays the content of the upper

folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder

is listed, cannot be used.

Engb 113

Chapter

Playing video files (from USB or SD)

9Stops playback

Searching for a specific scene

and starting playback from a

specified time

You can search for a desired scene by specify-

ing the time.

1 Touch [Search].

2 Touch the keys to input the target num-

ber or time and then touch [Enter].

!To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],

[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.

!To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],

[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.

!To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch

[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.

pTo cancel an input number, touch [Clear].

To cancel the input numbers, touch and

hold [Clear].

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can skip files forward or backward.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Using advanced functions

1 Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of

the screen to display the “USB”or “SD”

screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Touch the screen to display the touch

panel keys.

3 Touch .

The “Function”menu appears.

pIf the touch panel keys are not shown,

touch anywhere on the screen to display

them.

1 2

1Changes the repeat range

Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting

as follows:

!Media: Repeats all video files in the se-

lected external storage device (USB,

SD).

!File: Repeats just the current file.

!Folder: Repeats the current folder.

pIf you skip the file forward or backward

when the repeat play range in “File”, the

repeat play range changes to “Folder”.

2Changes the screen size of video

If a video file is played, you can select the

display mode between normal and full

screen.

Each touch of [Video Output Setting]

changes the setting as follows:

!Normal: Enlarges the display size while

maintaining the aspect ratio.

!Full: Displays the image full-screen

although the aspect ratio may be

changed.

Engb

114

Chapter

22 Playing video files (from USB or SD)

Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-

ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-

tion system.

pA USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU51V)

(sold separately) is required for connection.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Connect your iPod.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

=For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on

page 20.

pIf the iPod is already connected, tap [iPod]

on the left edge of the screen.

=For details, refer to Selecting a source

on page 72.

pIf you connect the iPhone or iPod touch,

quit applications before connecting.

pIf no video is output when iPod is selected

as AV source, check the setting in “AV1

Input”on the “AV System Settings”menu.

=For details, refer to Setting video input 1

(AV1)on page 158.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control your iPod.

=For details of the operation, refer to Using

the touch panel keys on page 117.

Reading the screen

Music

Video

17 3

1Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition.

Setting the shuffle play

Indicator Meaning

Cancels the shuffle play.

Plays back songs or videos in

random order within the se-

lected list.

Selects an album randomly, and

then plays back all songs in that

album in order.

The actions while this indicator

is displayed on the video opera-

tion screen vary depending on

the connected iPod.

Engb 115

Chapter

Using an iPod (iPod)

Setting a repeat play range

Indicator Meaning

Repeats all songs or videos in

the selected list.

Repeats just the current song or

video.

2Current song (episode) information

!:Artist name (podcast title)

Shows the artist name currently playing.

When a podcast is played, the podcast

title is displayed (when available).

!:Album title (release date)

Shows the title of the album for the

song. When a podcast is played, the re-

lease date is displayed (when available).

!:Song title (episode)

Shows the title of the current song.

When a podcast is played, the episode

is displayed (when available).

!:Chapter number

Shows the current chapter number and

total number of chapters when the file

with chapters played (when available).

!Play time

Shows the elapsed playing time within

the current song (episode).

p“-------”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

3Current time

4Song (episode) information

!Song number indicator

Shows the number of the song and the

total number of songs in the selected

list.

!Song title (episode) indicator

!Album artwork

Album art of the current song is dis-

played if it is available.

5Genre indicator

Shows the genre of the current song.

6Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

7Current video information

!:Chapter number

Shows the current chapter number

when the video with chapters played

(when available).

!:Artist name (podcast title)

Shows the artist name currently playing.

When a podcast is played, the podcast

title is displayed (when available).

!:File number indicator

Shows the number of the file currently

playing (when available).

!File name indicator

Shows the file name currently playing

(when available).

!Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within

the current file.

p“-------”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

pIf characters recorded on the iPod are not

compatible with this navigation system,

they may turn into garbled characters.

Engb

116

Chapter

23 Using an iPod (iPod)

Using the touch panel keys

Music

1 3

7 6 5

Video

h 6 ag

1Sets the shuffle play for music

The shuffle play setting can be changed by

touching only one key.

=For details, refer to Sets the shuffle

play for music on page 124.

2Sets a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by

touching only one key.

=For details, refer to Sets repeat play on

page 124.

3Displays the “MusicSphere”screen

Engb 117

Chapter

Using an iPod (iPod)

Touching the key displays the MusicSphere

screen, and a playlist created with the PC ap-

plication (MusicSphere) can be played.

=For details, refer to Playing Music-

Sphere on page 124.

4Selects a song to play

Scrolling the keys up or down displays songs,

and tapping a song starts playback.

Tapping the lower key during shuffle playback

skips to the next song. Tapping the upper key

once skip to the start of the current song. Tap-

ping it again will skip to the previous song.

When the song with chapters played, chapter

can be skipped back and forward.

5Displays the genre list

6Switches the control mode of iPod func-

tions

Touching the key lets you control the functions

of an iPod connected to the navigation system

from the iPod.

=For details, refer to Operating the func-

tions from your iPod on page 123.

Displays the operation screen of applica-

tion for iPhone

=For details, refer to Operating an applica-

tion for iPhone from the navigation sys-

tem on page 120.

7Displays the top category menu

Touching the key displays the top category for

song playback.

Displays the previously selected list

If you select the song from the list to play after

touching , touching the key displays the pre-

vious list.

8Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

9Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on page 124.

aPlayback and Pause

Touching [f] switches between playback

and pause.

bDisplays the song list

cDisplays the album list

dDisplays the artist list

eDisplays the top category menu

Touching the key displays the top category

menu for song or video playback.

Switches the operation screen

Tapping this key displays the touch panel key

([Video]or[Music]) to switch between the

screen to operate video files and the screen to

operate music files.

=For details of the operation, refer to

Starting the video playback on the next

page.

pThis touch panel key is available only

when there are both audio and video file

in your iPod.

pTouching [Video]or[Music] on the list

screens enables you to perform the

equivalent operation.

fSkips back or forward to another video

Touching [p] skips to the start of the next

video. Touching [o] once skips to the start

of the current video. Touching again will skip

to the previous video. When the video with

chapters played, chapter can be skipped back

and forward.

Fast reverse or forward

Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast reverse

or fast forward.

If you keep touching [o]or[p] for five

seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues

even if you release either of these keys. To re-

sume playback at a desired point, touch

[f], [o]or[p].

gHides the touch panel keys and informa-

tion of the current video

Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.

pIf you want to display the touch panel

keys and information of the current

video again, touch anywhere on the LCD

screen.

hDisplays the top category menu for video

Engb

118

Chapter

23 Using an iPod (iPod)

Touching the key displays the top category for

video playback.

Displays the previously selected list

If you select the video from the list to play

after touching , touching the key displays

the previous list.

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can skip songs, videos or podcasts for-

ward or backward.

When the song, video or podcast with chapter

played, you can skip chapter forward or back-

ward.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Starting the video playback

This navigation system can play video if an

iPod with video capabilities is connected.

1 Touch [iPod] on the left edge of the

screen to display the touch panel key to

switch to a video source.

2 Tap [Music].

A list of videos by category appears.

3 Tap one of the categories in that con-

tains the video you want to play.

4 Tap your desired item on the list to nar-

row down them until the video list ap-

pears.

=For details, refer to Narrowing down a song

or video with the list on this page.

5 On the video list, tap the video you

want to play.

Video playback will start.

6 Touch the screen to display the touch

panel keys.

=For details of the operation, refer to Using

the touch panel keys on page 117.

Narrowing down a song or

video with the list

Tapping an item on list allows you to search

for a song or video and play it in your iPod.

1 Display a list screen.

=For details, refer to Displays the genre list

on the previous page.

=For details, refer to Displays the song list

on the previous page.

=For details, refer to Displays the album

list on the previous page.

=For details, refer to Displays the artist list

on the previous page.

#If you touch , the top category menu screen

is displayed. Tap the category of your preference.

Engb 119

Chapter

Using an iPod (iPod)

2 Scroll by dragging tabs up or down to

display the character that you want to re-

fine.

Character tabs

3 Tap the tab to select the character and

display the page which includes applicable

options.

pAn article listed below and space at the be-

ginning of the artist name will be ignored

and the next character will be taken into ac-

count for searching.

!“A”or “a”

!“AN”,“An”,or“an”

!“THE”,“The”,or“the”

4 Scroll the list by dragging items up or

down to display the item you want to se-

lect.

Refine the item until the song title (episode) is

displayed on the list.

pTapping [All] on the list includes all options

in the current list. For example, if you tap

[All] after tapping [Artists], you can pro-

ceed to the next screen with all artists in

the list selected.

pAfter you select artists, albums, genres,

podcasts, or composers, go on to touch

and hold one of the list to start playing the

first song in the selected list and display the

next hierarchy.

5 On the song (episode) or video list, tap

the song (episode) or video you want to

play.

pAfter you select the song (episode) or video

using this function, touching displays

the list previously selected.

Operating an application

for iPhone from the

navigation system

WARNING

Certain uses of a smartphone may not be

legal while driving in your jurisdiction, so

you must be aware of and obey any such re-

strictions.

If in doubt as to a particular function, only

perform it while the car is parked.

No feature should be used unless it is safe to

do so under the driving conditions you are

experiencing.

This navigation system can switch to the Ad-

vanced App Mode, which you can display

and operate the application for iPhone on the

screen.

In Advanced App Mode, you can operate ap-

plications with finger gestures such as tap-

ping, dragging, scrolling or flicking on the

screen of the navigation system.

pBe sure to read Using app-based connected

content before you perform this operation.

=For details, refer to Using app-based con-

nected content on page 205.

Engb

120

Chapter

23 Using an iPod (iPod)

!Pioneer is not liable for any issues that may

arise from incorrect or flawed app-based

content.

!The content and functionality of the sup-

ported applications are the responsibility of

the App providers.

!In Advanced App Mode, functionality

through the product is limited while driving,

with available functions determined by the

App providers.

!Availability of Advanced App Mode func-

tionality is determined by the App provider,

and not determined by Pioneer.

!Advanced App Mode allows access to ap-

plications other than those listed (subject

to limitations while driving), but the extent

to which content can be used is determined

by the App providers.

This function can be operated with the follow-

ing iPhone models:

!iPod touch 4th generation

!iPhone 4S

!iPhone 4

pApplications operable by switching this na-

vigation system to Advanced App Mode

are only those available for Advanced App

Mode.

Please check iPhone applications sup-

ported Advanced App Mode at

http://www.pioneer.eu/AdvancedApp-

Mode

pThe compatible finger gestures vary de-

pending on the application for iPhone.

Starting procedure

1 Display the operation screen of the

iPhone.

=For details of the operation, refer to Starting

procedure on page 115.

2 Start an application available for Ad-

vanced App Mode from the iPhone.

An image of the application is displayed on

the screen of this navigation system.

pYou can start an application available for

Advanced App Mode also from a launcher

application.

3 Touch to hide the AV source icons or

wait until the source icons disappear.

pIf the source icons are displayed, you can-

not conduct the operation of application on

the screen.

4 Operate the application.

5 Touch the key to go back to the op-

eration screen of the iPhone.

Using the touch panel keys

1Displays the “Function”menu

2Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

3Switches to the normal mode

Tapping the key displays the operation screen

of iPhone.

4Starts the AppRadio app

Tapping the key starts AppRadio app, which

is a launcher application for applications

available for Advanced App Mode.

pTo use the AppRadio app in this naviga-

tion system, install the application to

the iPhone in advance.

For details about the AppRadio app,

visit the following site:

http://www.pioneer.eu/AppRadio

Engb 121

Chapter

Using an iPod (iPod)

pIn some iPhone modes, selecting a

source may start up an application for

iPhone. If the message “Please check

your smartphone screen when it is

safe and lawful for you to do so.”ap-

pears, start up the application from your

iPhone.

5Displays the AV source icons

Tapping the key shows the AV source icons.

pIf you touch , switches to . If you

touch , the AV source icons are hid-

den and switches to .

Using the keyboard

CAUTION

For your safety, the keyboard functionality is only

available when the vehicle is stopped and the

handbrake is engaged.

pKeyboard is available only in Advanced

App Mode.

When you tap a text input area of an applica-

tion for iPhone, a keyboard will be displayed

on-screen. You can input the desired text di-

rectly from this navigation system.

pThe language preference for the keyboard

of this navigation system should be same

as the setting on your iPhone.

If the settings for this product and the

iPhone are different, you may not be able to

enter characters properly.

1 Set language preference for the key-

board of the iPhone.

2 Display the operation screen of the

iPhone.

=For details of the operation, refer to Starting

procedure on page 115.

3 Touch .

4 Touch .

The “Function”menu appears.

5 Touch [Keyboard].

The “Select Keyboard”screen appears.

6 Touch the desired language.

After the language is selected, the previous

screen returns.

7 Tap the text input area on the applica-

tion screen of the iPhone.

The keyboard for entering the text appears.

345

1Enters the characters

2Deletes the input text one letter at a

time, beginning at the end of the text

3Confirms the entry and allows you to

proceed to the next step

4Hides the keyboard and text can now

be entered using the keyboard of

iPhone

5Changes the iPhone keyboard layout

pThe iPhone keyboard layouts that can be

selected by tapping depends on the

setting of Hardware Keyboard Layout of

your iPhone.

6Switches to a keyboard offering nu-

meric and symbol characters

7Converts the case of the keyboard char-

acters

When using an application not

compatible with Advanced App

Mode

When an application not compatible with Ad-

vanced App Mode is started, depending on

the application, you can operate it with the

touch panel key displayed. However, the beha-

viour when touching the key depends on the

application.

Also, the display of images on the screen of

this navigation system depends on the appli-

cation.

Engb

122

Chapter

23 Using an iPod (iPod)

1 Display the operation screen of the

iPhone.

=For details of the operation, refer to Starting

procedure on page 115.

2 Touch .

The operation of music or video sources is

switched to your iPhone.

3 Start an application from the iPhone.

4 Touch the key to go back to the op-

eration screen of the iPhone.

Operating the functions

from your iPod

You can switch operation of the music or

video sources to your iPod.

pThe following operations can be performed

from the navigation system even if other

operations are performed from your iPod.

!Playback and Pause

!Fast reverse or forward

!Skip forward or backward

!Adjusting the volume

pSound is output from the speakers of your

vehicle even if the iPod operations is per-

formed from your iPod.

Starting procedure

1 Display the operation screen of the

iPod.

=For details of the operation, refer to Starting

procedure on page 115.

2 Touch .

The operation of music or video sources is

switched to your iPod.

3 Operate the music or video sources

with iPod.

4 Touch the key to go back to the op-

eration screen of the iPod.

Using the touch panel keys

1Displays the “Function”menu

2Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

3Switches to the normal mode

Tapping the key displays the operation screen

of iPod.

4Hides the AV source icons

Tapping the key shows only the current image.

pIf you touch , switches to . If you

touch , the AV source icons are dis-

played and switches to .

5Operates the iPod

The operations activated by touching vary de-

pending on the connected iPod.

Engb 123

Chapter

Using an iPod (iPod)

Playing MusicSphere

You can play playlists created with the PC ap-

plication (MusicSphere) using an exciting gra-

phic interface.

pPC application (MusicSphere) will be avail-

able on our website.

Starting procedure

1 Display the music operation screen of

the iPod.

=For details of the operation, refer to Starting

procedure on page 115.

2 Touch .

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

plays the “MusicSphere”screen on page

117.

Reading the screen

1Category name and total number of songs

Shows the category name and the total num-

ber of playable songs in the playlist currently

selected.

2Song title indicator

Shows six songs including the first song

played after selecting the playlist.

3Playlist name indicator

Shows the name of the playlist currently se-

lected.

4Current time

5Category name

Shows the category name in the playlist.

Using the touch panel keys

1Switches to the AV operation screen

2Plays the playlist

Tapping a key moves the playlist to the centre

of the screen, and tapping the centre key

starts playback.

pTo change the playlist to be displayed,

rotate the sphere by dragging the keys

up, down, left, or right.

Using advanced functions

%Touch on the “iPod”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

1 2 3 4

1Sets repeat play

There are two repeat play types for play-

back.

Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting

as follows:

!All: Repeats all songs or videos in the

selected list.

!One: Repeats just the current song or

video.

2Sets the shuffle play for music

Engb

124

Chapter

23 Using an iPod (iPod)

This function shuffles songs or albums and

plays them in random order.

Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting

as follows:

!Off: Does not shuffle.

!Songs: Plays back songs or videos in

random order within the selected list.

!Albums: Selects an album randomly,

and then plays back all songs in that

album in order.

3Sets the audiobook play speed

While listening to an audiobook on iPod,

playback speed can be changed.

Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the

setting as follows:

!Normal: Playback in normal speed

!Faster: Playback faster than normal

speed

!Slower: Playback slower than normal

speed

4Plays video in wide screen mode

If the video is compatible with wide screen

format, set “Widescreen”to “On”in order

to view the video image in the wide screen.

Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the

setting as follows:

!On: Outputs the wide-screen video from

an iPod.

!Off: Outputs the normal-sized video

from an iPod.

pDisplay size is changed after you

change “Widescreen”setting and select

the video to play.

pThis setting is available only during the

video operation.

5Plays songs related to the currently

playing song

You can play songs related to the currently

playing song, using of the following lists.

!Link Artists: Songs related to the cur-

rently playing artist will be played in the

album order.

!Link Albums: Songs related to the cur-

rently playing album will be played.

!Link Genres: Songs related to the cur-

rently playing genre will be played in the

artist order.

6Selects the display language of the key-

board

You can select the display language of the

keyboard used in Advanced App Mode.

pThis setting is available only when you

change the screen of the navigation sys-

tem to the screen of the application for

iPhone.

Engb 125

Chapter

Using an iPod (iPod)

WARNING

Certain uses of a smartphone may not be

legal while driving in your jurisdiction, so

you must be aware of and obey any such re-

strictions.

If in doubt as to a particular function, only

perform it while the car is parked.

No feature should be used unless it is safe to

do so under the driving conditions you are

experiencing.

When connecting smartphone with the Aha

Radio installed, you can control, view, and/or

hear Aha Radio content from this navigation

system. You can also display POI information

from the Aha Radio application on the map

screen and route to these POIs.

pThe following smartphones can use this

function.

!iPhone and iPod touch with iOS 3.0 or

higher.

!Android™device with Android 2.2 or

higher and supports Bluetooth SPP (Se-

rial Port Profile).

pCompatibility with all Android de-

vices is not guaranteed.

For details about Android device

compatibility with this navigation

system, refer to the information on

our website.

pThe connecting method varies depending

on the your type of smartphone.

!iPhone: connecting to this navigation

system via USB interface cable for iPod

(CD-IU51V) (sold separately).

!Android device: connecting to this navi-

gation system via Bluetooth wireless

technology

pIn this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch will

be referred to as iPhone.

pFor details concerning operations, refer to

the Help and Tips section within the Aha

Radio application.

pAha Radio stations may require initial

setup or sign-in before the station can be

accessed.

pBe sure to read Using app-based connected

content before you perform this operation.

=For details, refer to Using app-based con-

nected content on page 205.

Note:

!Certain functionality of the Aha Radio service

may not be available when accessing the ser-

vice through the Pioneer navigation system,

including, but not limited to, creating new

Aha stations, deleting Aha stations, recording

‘shouts’by voice, adjusting Aha Radio App

settings, logging into Facebook, creating a Fa-

cebook account, logging into Twitter, or creat-

ing a Twitter account.

!Aha Radio is a service not affiliated with

Pioneer. More information is available at

http://www.ahamobile.com.

!A specific version of the Aha Radio applica-

tion is required to be installed on your smart-

phone in order to enjoy Aha Radio content on

this navigation system.

Because the application for the smartphone is

not provided by Pioneer, the required version

of the application may not yet be available at

the time of purchase of the navigation system.

Availability, version and update information

can be found at

http://www.pioneer.eu/aharadio

Starting procedure

The procedure varies depending on your type

of smartphone.

For Android device users

1 Register the device in this navigation

system.

pWhen registering the device, you must se-

lect either “Handsfree and Audio”or

“Audio”.

pThe registered device must be set for prior-

ity connecting.

=For details, refer to Registering your

Bluetooth devices on page 57.

Engb

126

Chapter

24 Using Aha Radio

2 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

3 Touch [App Connection] and set to

“Bluetooth”.

pThis key is not available when an Aha Radio

source has already been selected.

4 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

5 Tap [aha] on the left side of the screen

to display the “aha”screen.

When you tap [aha], the navigation system at-

tempts to establish the Bluetooth connection.

After the connection is successfully estab-

lished, the touch panel keys on the “aha”

screen are activated.

6 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the Aha Radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 129.

For iPhone users

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [App Connection] and set to

“Wired”.

pThis key is not available when an Aha Radio

source has already been selected.

3 Start up the Aha Radio application in-

stalled on the iPhone.

pBefore starting up, sign-in to Aha Radio

from your iPhone.

4 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

5 Connect your iPhone.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

=For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on

page 20.

pIf the iPhone is already connected, tap

[aha] on the left edge of the screen.

pIn some iPhone modes, selecting a source

may start up an iPhone application. If the

message “Please check your smartphone

screen when it is safe and lawful for you

to do so.”appears, start up the application

from your iPhone.

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 72.

6 Tap [aha] on the left side of the screen

to display the “aha”screen.

7 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the Aha Radio.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 129.

Engb 127

Chapter

Using Aha Radio

Reading the screen

1Current station information

Shows which source has been selected.

!Station name

Shows the name of the Aha Radio sta-

tion that the navigation system is cur-

rently tuned to.

!Detailed information

Shows the information on the content

currently being played.

p“-------”is displayed if there is no

corresponding information.

!Rating information

Shows the rated value of the current

content displayed (only when and where

applicable).

2Current time

3Content image

Displays an image of the current content if

one is available.

4Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

Engb

128

Chapter

24 Using Aha Radio

Using the touch panel keys

1Selects an Aha Radio station from the list

Touching this key displays the list of your avail-

able Aha Radio stations. Touch the desired

Aha Radio station to change Aha sources.

=For details of the list operations, refer to

Operating list screens (e.g. iPod list

screen) on page 72.

Scroll the list by dragging items up or down to

display the item you want to select.

2Playback and pause (or stop)

Touch [d] to start playback. Touching [e] dur-

ing playback, pauses or stops playback.

pPause (or stop) key functionality de-

pends on the content.

3Selects content to play

Scrolling the keys up or down displays avail-

able content while tapping a key starts play-

back.

4Connects a smartphone via Bluetooth

wireless technology manually

pThis key is available only when “App

Connection”is set to “Bluetooth”.

=For details, refer to Starting procedure on

page 126.

5Performs additional functions of each sta-

tion or content currently playing

pThe icons displayed vary depending on

each station or content.

Indicator Meaning

Touching the key discloses the

current car location through

Aha Radio.

Touching the key retweets the

selected tweets with your Twitter

account.

Touching the key performs fast

reverse of the current content

for 30 seconds.

Touching the key sends you to

the Location confirmation

screen the selected POI to

search for the desired route.

=For the subsequent opera-

tions, refer to Setting a route

to your destination on page

44.

Engb 129

Chapter

Using Aha Radio

Indicator Meaning

Touching the key “likes”current

content.

pDepending on the content,

touching or cancels

“likes”.

Touching the key “dislikes”cur-

rent content.

pDepending on the content,

touching or cancels

“dislikes”.

Touching the key unsubscribes

the selected content. The unsub-

scribed content will be deleted

from the My Feeds station.

Touching the key follows the cur-

rent content. The followed con-

tent will be added to the My

Feeds station.

Touching the key lets you make

a call to a phone number regis-

tered in the current content

using the hands-free function.

6Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

7Pauses the content currently playing and

shows a text pop-up screen

p“-------”is displayed if there is no corre-

sponding information.

Pop-up screen

pTouching closes the pop-up screen

and plays the content.

Functions coupled with

Aha Radio and the

navigation system

Depending on the stations, functions coupled

with the navigation system are available.

Displaying POIs obtained with

Aha Radio

If you select a station with content that in-

cludes POI location information, the corre-

sponding POI icons will appear on the map

screen. A maximum of 30 POI icons are dis-

played at one time.

Detailed information can be displayed by pla-

cing the scroll cursor over the POI icon.

=For details, refer to Viewing information

about a specified location on page 30.

pThe POI icons on the map will not disap-

pear even when the smartphone is re-

moved.

The icons will disappear with the following

operations:

!Turning off the ignition switch (ACC

OFF)

!Initialising user data

!Updating the display of the Aha POI

icons

pAha POI icons are updated at the following

intervals.

!When a station with content including

location information is reselected

!When the content lists of the Aha appli-

cation are updated

!If there are 30 or more content items se-

lected and 31st POI is read

Engb

130

Chapter

24 Using Aha Radio

You can control the Bluetooth audio player.

pBefore using the Bluetooth audio player,

you need to register and connect the device

to this navigation system.

=For details, refer to Registering your

Bluetooth devices on page 57.

pOperations may vary depending on the

kind of a Bluetooth audio player.

pDepending on the Bluetooth audio player

connected to this navigation system, the

available operations with this navigation

system are limited to the following two le-

vels:

!A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribu-

tion Profile): Only playing back songs on

your audio player is possible.

!A2DP profile and AVRCP profile (Audio/

Video Remote Control Profile): Playing

back, pausing, selecting songs, etc., are

possible.

pSince there are a number of Bluetooth

audio players available on the market, op-

erations with your Bluetooth audio player

using this navigation system vary greatly in

range. Please refer to the instruction man-

ual that came with your Bluetooth audio

player as well as this manual while operat-

ing your player on this navigation system.

pWhile you are listening to songs on your

Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from

operating your mobile phone as much as

possible. If you try operating on your mo-

bile phone, the signal from your mobile

phone may cause a noise on the song play-

back.

pEven if you switch to another source while

listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio

player, the playback of song continues to

elapse.

pDepending on the Bluetooth audio player

you connected to this navigation system,

operations on this navigation system to

control the player may differ from those ex-

plained in this manual.

pWhen you are talking on a mobile phone

connected to this unit via Bluetooth wire-

less technology, song playback from your

Bluetooth audio player connected to this

unit may be paused.

Starting procedure

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2 Tap [Audio] on the left edge of the

screen to display the “Audio”screen.

3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen

to control the Bluetooth audio player.

=For details, refer to Using the touch panel

keys on page 133.

Reading the screen

312

1Playback condition indicator

Indicates the current playback condition if the

connected Bluetooth audio player features

AVRCP 1.3.

Playing files in random order

Indicator Meaning

Does not play files in random

order.

Plays all audio files in the cur-

rent repeat play range in ran-

dom order.

Setting a repeat play range

Indicator Meaning

Does not repeat.

Repeats just the current file.

Repeats all audio files in the

Bluetooth audio player.

Engb 131

Chapter

Using the Bluetooth audio player

2Current file information

If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea-

tures AVRCP 1.3, the following file information

will be displayed.

!:Artist name

Shows the artist name currently playing

(when available).

!:Album title

Shows the title of the album of the cur-

rent file (when available).

!:Track title

Shows the title of the track currently

playing (when available).

!Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time within

the current file.

!File number indicator

Shows the file number currently playing

(when available).

pIn the following cases, file information

will only be displayed after a file starts

or resumes playing:

!You connect the Bluetooth audio

player compatible with AVRCP1.3,

and operate the player to start play-

ing.

!You select another file when play-

back is paused.

3Current time

4Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

5Device name indicator

6Connection status indicator

Shows whether the device featuring Bluetooth

technology is connected or not.

Engb

132

Chapter

25 Using the Bluetooth audio player

Using the touch panel keys

546

1Plays files in random order

All of the files within the repeat play range

can be played at random by touching only one

key.

pThis function is available only when the

connected Bluetooth audio player fea-

tures AVRCP 1.3.

=For details, refer to Plays files in ran-

dom order on the next page.

2Sets a repeat play range

The repeat play range can be changed by

touching only one key.

pThis function is available only when the

connected Bluetooth audio player fea-

tures AVRCP 1.3.

=For details, refer to Changes the repeat

range on the next page.

3Playback and Pause

Touching [d]or[e] switches between play-

back and pause.

4Connects the Bluetooth audio player

Touching [Connect] displays the connection

standby screen and the navigation system

waits for the Bluetooth wireless connection re-

quest.

5Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

6Displays the “Function”menu

=For details, refer to Using advanced func-

tions on the next page.

Operating by hardware

buttons

Pressing the TRK button

You can skip files forward or backward.

Pressing and holding the TRK button

You can perform fast reverse or fast for-

ward.

Engb 133

Chapter

Using the Bluetooth audio player

Using advanced functions

pThis menu is available only when the con-

nected Bluetooth audio player features

AVRCP 1.3.

%Touch on the “Audio”screen.

The “Function”menu appears.

1 2

1Changes the repeat range

Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting

as follows:

!All: Repeats all audio files in the

Bluetooth audio player.

!Track: Repeats just the current file.

!Off: Does not repeat.

pIf you skip the file forward or backward

when the repeat play range in “Track”,

the repeat play range changes to “All”.

2Plays files in random order

Random play lets you playback files in ran-

dom order within the current repeat range.

Each touch of [Random] turns it on or

off.

Engb

134

Chapter

25 Using the Bluetooth audio player

You can display the video image output by the

equipment connected to the navigation sys-

tem. For details of the connection method,

refer to Installation Manual.

pWith the AVIC-F840BT, AV input 2 connec-

tion is not available. And AVIC-F840BT

shows “AV Input”as “AV1 Input”.

CAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view

video images, you must stop in a safe place and

apply the handbrake.

Reading the screen

1Current time

2Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

Using AV1

You can display the video image output by the

equipment connected to video input 1.

1 Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV System

Settings”menu.

=For details, refer to Setting video input 1

(AV1)on page 158.

2 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

3 Tap [AV1] on the left edge of the

screen.

The image is displayed on the screen.

4 Touch the screen to display the touch

panel keys.

Using AV2

You can display the video image output by the

equipment connected to video input 2.

1 Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV System

Settings”menu.

=For details, refer to Setting video input 2

(AV2)on page 159.

2 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

3 Tap [AV2] on the left edge of the

screen.

The image is displayed on the screen.

4 Touch the screen to display the touch

panel keys.

Using the touch panel keys

1Recalls equaliser curves

=For details, refer to Using the equaliser

on page 163.

2Hides the touch panel keys

Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.

pIf you want to display the touch panel

keys again, touch anywhere on the LCD

screen.

Engb 135

Chapter

Using AV input

Displaying the screen for

navigation settings

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

pThis can also be operated using the “Short-

cut Menu”screen.

3 Touch [Navi Settings].

The “Navi Settings”menu appears.

4 Touch the item that you want to

change the setting.

#If you touch , the previous screen re-

turns.

Checking the connections

of leads

Check that leads are properly connected be-

tween the navigation system and the vehicle.

Please also check whether they are connected

in the correct positions.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on this page.

2 Touch [Connection Status].

The “Connection Status”screen appears.

1Speed Pulse

The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-

gation system is shown. “0”is shown while

the vehicle is stationary.

2GPS Antenna

Indicates the connection status of the GPS

aerial, the reception sensitivity, and from

how many satellites the signal is received.

Colour Signal com-

munication

Used in posi-

tioning

Orange Yes Yes

Yellow Yes No

pWhen the GPS aerial is connected to

this navigation system, “OK”is dis-

played.

When the GPS aerial is not connected to

this navigation system, “NOK”is dis-

played.

pIf reception is poor, please change the

installation position of the GPS aerial.

3Handbrake

When the handbrake is applied, “On”is dis-

played. When the handbrake is released,

“Off”is displayed.

4Illumination

When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-

hicle are on, “On”is displayed. When the

small lamps of a vehicle are off, “Off”is dis-

played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-

nected, “Off”appears.)

5Back Signal

Engb

136

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

When the gear stick is shifted to “R”, the

signal switches to “High”or “Low”. (One of

these is displayed depending on the vehi-

cle.)

6Vehicle Bus

When the optional Vehicle Bus adapter is

connected, “Connected”is displayed. If not

connected, “–”is displayed.

Checking sensor learning

status and driving status

pThe navigation system can automatically

use its sensor memory based on the outer

dimensions of the tyres.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [3D Calibration Status].

The “3D Calibration Status”screen appears.

1Speed

Indicates the speed detected by the naviga-

tion system. (This indication may be differ-

ent from the actual speed of your vehicle,

so please do not use this instead of the

speedometer.)

2Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational

speed

Indicates acceleration or deceleration velo-

city of your vehicle. Also, rotational speed

when your vehicle turns to left or right is

shown.

3Distance

Indicates driving distance.

4Speed Pulse

Indicates the total number of speed pulses.

5Learning Status

Indicates the current driving mode.

6Inclination

Indicates the degree of slope of the street

that you are currently on.

7Degree of learning

Sensor learning situations for distance

(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn

(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D Detec-

tion) are indicated by the length of bars.

pWhen tyres have been changed or

chains fitted, turning on the Speed

Pulse allows the system to detect the

fact that the tyre diameter has changed,

and automatically replaces the value for

calculating distance.

pIf a separately sold speed pulse genera-

tor (ND-PG1) is connected, the distance

calculation value cannot be replaced

automatically.

Clearing status

You can delete the learned results stored in

“Distance”,“Speed Pulse”or “Learning Sta-

tus”.

1 Touch [Distance] or [Speed Pulse].

The following message appears.

2 Touch [Yes].

Clears the results stored in “Distance”or

“Speed Pulse”.

3 Touch [Learning Status].

The following message appears.

Engb 137

Chapter

Customising preferences

4 Touch [All].

Clears all leaning results.

pTouch [All] for the following cases:

!After changing the installation position

of the navigation system

!After changing the installation angle of

the navigation system

!After moving the navigation system to

another vehicle

#If you touch [Distance], all learned results

stored in “Distance”are cleared.

Using the fuel consumption

function

Inputting the fuel consumption

information for calculating the

fuel cost

You can estimate the fuel cost to your destina-

tion by entering the fuel consumption informa-

tion in the navigation system.

=For details, refer to Setting a route to your

destination on page 44.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

2 Touch [Fuel cons.].

The “Fuel Mileage Setting”screen appears.

3 Enter the fuel consumption informa-

tion.

Enter the following items:

!Surface Road Fuel Mileage:

Enter the fuel cost when you drive on ordin-

ary roads.

!Motorway Fuel Mileage:

Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the

motorway.

!Fuel Price Per Unit:

Enter the fuel unit price.

!Fuel Unit:

Set the fuel unit.

!Currency:

Set the unit of currency.

pThe unit in “Surface Road Fuel Mileage”

and “Motorway Fuel Mileage”depend on

the one chosen in “Fuel Unit”.

!When “Fuel Unit”is set to “Litre”.

Enter how much fuel you need to travel

100 kilometres (60 miles).

!When “Fuel Unit”is set to “Gallon”.

Enter how many kilometres (miles) you

get to a gallon.

When all the items are entered, inputting the

fuel consumption information is complete.

Calculating the fuel consumption

When you enter the fuelling information to the

navigation system, and export the data to SD

memory cards, you can check the fuel con-

sumption information by using the utility pro-

gramme NavGate FEEDS, which is available

separately, on your PC.

pUp to 24 sets of data can be stored. You

can also export the data, as described

below.

Engb

138

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

If the entries reach the maximum number,

a new entry will overwrite the oldest one.

These calculations are based only on the infor-

mation that you provide and not on any data

from the vehicle. The fuel mileage displayed is

only a reference value, and does not guarantee

the fuel mileage displayed can be obtained.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

2 Touch [Fuel cons.].

The “Fuel Mileage Setting”screen appears.

3 Touch [Fuel Price Calculation].

The “Fuel Price Calculation”screen appears.

4 Enter the fuel consumption informa-

tion.

Enter the following items:

!Distance:

Enter the distance travelled since the pre-

vious fuelling.

pThe distance is entered automatically

only when the distance travelled since

the previous fuelling is recorded.

!Fuel Pumped:

Enter the amount of fuel pumped.

!Fuel Price Per Unit:

Enter the fuel unit price.

When all the items are entered, the fuel con-

sumption is displayed next to “Fuel cons.”.

5 Touch [OK].

The “Fuel Mileage Setting”screen appears.

Exporting the data of fuel cost

information

Exporting the fuel cost data to an SD memory

card is possible.

pThe data stored in this navigation system

will be cleared as exporting it to the SD

memory card.

pIf there is previous data in the SD memory

card, the data is overwritten with new data.

1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

2 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

3 Touch [Fuel cons.].

The “Fuel Mileage Setting”screen appears.

Engb 139

Chapter

Customising preferences

4 Touch [Export].

After a message confirming whether to export

the data appeared, exporting the data to the

SD memory card starts.

The “Fuel Mileage Setting”screen appears

when it is done.

Recording your travel history

Activating the track logger enables you to re-

cord your driving history (called “track log”

below). You can review the travel history later.

pIf an SD memory card is inserted into the

SD card slot, the track logs will be stored in

the SD memory card.

1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

2 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

3 Touch [Drive Log Settings].

The “Drive Log Settings”screen appears.

4 Touch [Drive Log Settings].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!Off (default):

You cannot export your track log to the SD

memory card.

!On:

You can store your track log to the SD mem-

ory card.

pWhile the setting is “On”, the navigation

system continues to store the track logs in

the inserted SD memory card.

5 Touch [Type].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!Private (default):

Changes the track log attribute to “Private”.

!Business:

Changes the track log attribute to “Busi-

ness”.

!Other:

Changes the track log attribute to

“Other”.

Using the demonstration

guidance

This is a demonstration function for retail

stores. After a route is set, touching this key

starts the simulation of route guidance.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

2 Touch [Demo Mode].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!Off (default):

The demonstration guidance is set off.

!On:

Repeats the demonstration guidance.

3 Display the map screen.

The demonstration guidance will begin.

=For details of the operations, refer to Screen

switching overview on page 24.

Engb

140

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

Registering your home

Registering your home position saves time

and effort. Also, routes to home positions can

be calculated easily with a single touch of the

key from the “Destination Menu”. The regis-

tered home position can also be modified

later.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

2 Touch [Set Home].

The “Set Home”screen appears.

3 Touch [Home].

The “Select Search Method”screen appears.

#If you touch [Phone#], you can edit your

home phone number.

p[Phone#] is only available when you have

already registered your home phone num-

ber.

4 Search for a location.

=For details, refer to Chapter 6.

After searching for a point, the map of the se-

lected position is displayed.

5 Touch [OK].

The location is registered, and then the “Set

Home”screen appears.

6 Touch [OK].

The registration is complete.

Correcting the current location

Touch the screen to adjust the current position

and direction of the vehicle displayed on the

map.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

2 Touch [Modify Current Location].

3 Scroll to the position where you want

to set, then touch [OK].

4 Touch the arrow key on the screen to

set the direction, then touch [OK].

Changing the eco-function

setting

You can change the eco-function setting.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

2 Touch [Eco Settings].

The “Eco Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch each item.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

!Eco Score

!On (default):

Displays “Eco Score”.

!Off:

Hides “Eco Score”.

Engb 141

Chapter

Customising preferences

=For details, refer to Checking the eco-friendly

driving status on page 33.

!Eco Drive Level

!On (default):

After you arrive the destination, a mes-

sage appears and a beep sounds if the

level of “Eco Drive Level”have in-

creased or decreased.

!Off:

No message appears and no sound

beeps when the vehicle reaches the des-

tination.

=For details, refer to Displaying Eco Drive

Level guidance on page 34.

!Rapid Start Warning

!Off (default):

No message appears and no sound

beeps when the vehicle experiences a

sudden start.

!On:

A message appears and a sound beeps

when the vehicle experiences a sudden

start.

=For details, refer to Sudden start alert on

page 34.

4 Touch [OK].

The settings are complete.

Clearing the fuel consumption

information

You can clear the fuel consumption informa-

tion accumulated to date.

1 Display the “Navi Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

navigation settings on page 136.

2 Touch [Eco Settings].

The “Eco Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Clear Eco Record].

The message confirming whether to clear the

fuel consumption information appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

Fuel consumption data are cleared.

Displaying the screen for

map settings

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [Map Settings].

The “Map Settings”screen appears.

4 Touch the item that you want to

change the setting.

#If you touch , the previous screen re-

turns.

Engb

142

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

Setting the auto-zoom display

This setting enables switching to an enlarged

map around the point where your vehicle is

approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of

motorway or a junction.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [Close Up View].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!On (default):

Switches to an enlarged map.

!Off:

Does not switch to an enlarged map.

Setting the detailed city map

pThe detailed city map and this setting are

available for AVIC-F40BT only.

You can select whether to display the city map

when in certain metropolitan city areas.

pThe city map is displayed when the map

scale is 50 metres (0.05 mile) or less.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [City Map].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!On (default):

Automatically switches to the city map

when in a city map area.

!Off:

Does not show the city map.

pEven if you switch “City Map”to “On”,

city map cannot be displayed in areas

where there is no city map data.

Setting the barrier graphic

for city map

pThe detailed city map and this setting are

available for AVIC-F40BT only.

On the city map screen, you can display a

“barrier graphic”pattern where no city map

data is available. This prevents a normal map

of a different scale from being displayed at the

same time, greatly enhancing the clarity of the

city map on screen.

barrier graphic

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [City Map Barrier].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!On (default):

Displays the barrier graphic for city map.

When the vehicle position or cursor enters

the barrier graphic area, the graphic disap-

pears and a normal map is displayed full

screen.

!Off:

Does not display the barrier graphic for city

map. When the vehicle position or cursor

enters the area where no city map data is

available, a normal map is displayed full

screen.

Engb 143

Chapter

Customising preferences

Setting the speed limit display

Selects whether to display or hide the speed

limit of the current road.

Speed Limit

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [Show Speed Limit].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!Hide (default):

Hides the speed limit on the map.

!View:

Displays the speed limit on the map.

Displaying the traffic

notification icon

Selects whether to display or hide the traffic

notification icons on the map when incidents

occur on your route.

=For details, refer to Checking traffic informa-

tion manually on page 55.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [Show Traffic Incident].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!View (default):

Displays the icons on the map.

!Hide:

Hides the icons on the map.

Displaying the Bluetooth

connection icon

Selects whether to display or hide the icon for

current status of the phone connection via

Bluetooth wireless technology.

Bluetooth connection icon

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [Bluetooth Connected].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!View (default):

Displays the Bluetooth connection icon on

the map.

!Hide:

Hides the Bluetooth connection icon on the

map.

Setting the current street

name display

Selects whether to display or hide the street

name (or city name) that your vehicle is travel-

ling along.

Engb

144

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [Current Street Name].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!View (default):

Displays the street name (or city name) on

the map.

!Hide:

Hides the street name (or city name) on the

map.

Setting the display of icons

of favourite locations

You can select whether to display the “Favour-

ites”icon on the map.

p“Favourites”icons are displayed when the

map scale is 20 kilometres (10 miles) or

less.

=For details, refer to Editing the favourite lo-

cation in the list on page 49.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [Favourites Icon].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!On (default):

Displays the “Favourites”icon on the map.

!Off:

Hides the “Favourites”icon on the map.

Displaying the 3D landmarks

pThe 3D landmarks and this setting are

available for AVIC-F40BT only.

You can select whether to display the 3D land-

mark on the map.

p3D landmark only appears when the view

mode is “3D View”and the map scale is

set to 200 m (0.25 mile) or lower.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [3D Land Mark].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!On (default):

Displays the 3D landmark on the map.

!Off:

Hides the 3D landmark on the map.

Engb 145

Chapter

Customising preferences

Displaying manoeuvres

Selects whether to display or hide manoeuvres

on the map.

Manoeuvres

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [Show Manoeuvre].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!View (default):

Displays manoeuvres on the map.

!Hide:

Hides manoeuvres on the map.

Displaying the fuel

consumption information

Selects whether to display Eco-Meter, indicat-

ing the fuel consumption information, on the

map.

pEco-Meter appears when “2D View”or

“3D View”is selected.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Displayed Info].

The “Displayed Information”screen appears.

3 Touch [Show Eco Meter].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!View (default):

Displays Eco-Meter on the map.

!Hide:

Hides Eco-Meter on the map.

Displaying POI on the map

Displays icons for the surrounding facilities

(POI) on the map.

pPOI icons are not displayed when the map

scale is 1 kilometre (0.75 mile) or more.

pUp to 200 items, 100 preinstalled POIs or

100 custom POIs, are displayed on the

map.

Displaying preinstalled POIs on

the map

pYou can select up to 10 items from the sub-

categories or detailed categories.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Overlay POI].

The “Overlay POI”screen appears.

3 Touch [Display] to change the setting to

“On”.

pIf you do not want to display the POI icon

on the map, touch [Display] to turn it

“Off”. (Even if “Display”is turned “Off”,

the POI selection setting is retained.)

Engb

146

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

4 Touch [POI].

The “Overlay POI (Main Category)”screen

appears.

5 Touch the main category you want.

A list of subcategories under the selected

main category appears.

pCategories that are already selected will

have a blue tick mark.

6 Touch the subcategory to display.

A red tick mark appears next to the selected

category. To cancel the selection, touch the

entry again.

If there are detailed categories within the sub-

category, [Detail] is active. If you select the

subcategory such, all detailed categories with-

in the subcategory is selected and [Detail] be-

comes inactive.

#If you touch [Detail], the detailed categories

under the subcategory are displayed. Select a de-

tailed category of your preference and touch

[OK].

pWhen only a few detailed categories are se-

lected, a blue tick mark will appear next to

the selected subcategory.

7 Touch [OK].

The “Overlay POI (Main Category)”screen

returns.

If you want to select or deselect other items,

repeat these steps as many as necessary.

8 To finish the selection, touch [OK] in

the “Overlay POI (Main Category)”screen.

Displaying the customised POIs

Creating a customised POI is possible by

using the utility programme NavGate FEEDS

which is available separately, on your PC.

(NavGate FEEDS will be available on our web-

site.) Storing the customised POI properly and

inserting the SD memory card enables the sys-

tem to display the icons on the map screen.

pYou can select up to 10 items from the sub-

categories or detailed categories.

1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

2 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

3 Touch [Overlay POI].

The “Overlay POI”screen appears.

4 Touch [Display] to change the setting to

“On”.

pIf you do not want to display the POI icon

on the map, touch [Display] to turn it

“Off”. (Even if “Display”is turned “Off”,

the POI selection setting is retained.)

5 Touch [Custom POI].

The list of POI categories appears.

Engb 147

Chapter

Customising preferences

6 Touch the items you want to display.

7 To finish the selection, touch [OK].

Changing the view mode

Various types of screen displays can be se-

lected for navigation guidance.

=For details of the operation, refer to Switch-

ing the view mode on page 32.

Setting the map colour change

between day and night

To improve the visibility of the map during the

evening, you can set the timing for changing

the combination of the map colour.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Day/Night Display].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!Automatic (default):

You can change the colours of a map be-

tween daytime and nighttime according to

whether the vehicle lights are on or off.

!Day:

The map is always displayed with daytime

colours.

pTo use this function with “Automatic”, the

orange/white lead of the navigation system

must be connected correctly.

Changing the road colour

You can set the road colour to bluish or red-

dish.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Road Colour].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!Red (default):

Changes to red based road colours.

!Blue:

Changes to blue based road colours.

Changing the setting of

navigation interruption screen

You can set whether to automatically switch to

the navigation screen from the AV screen

when your vehicle approaches a guidance

point such as an intersection.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [AV Guide Mode].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!On (default):

Switches from the AV operation screen to

the map screen.

!Off:

Does not switch the screen.

pThis setting is effective only when “Close

Up View”is set to “On”.

Engb

148

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

Selecting the “Quick Access”

Select items to display on the map screen. In

the list displayed on screen, the items with red

tick marks are displayed on the map screen.

Touch the item you want to display and then

touch [OK] when a red check appears. You

can select up to five items.

1 Display the “Map Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

map settings on page 142.

2 Touch [Quick Access Selection].

The “Quick Access Selection”screen appears.

3 Touch the item that you want to set in

“Quick Access”.

You can select the following items:

pSettings marked with an asterisk (*) show

that these are default or factory settings.

!:Registration*

cated by the cursor to “Favourites”.

=For details, refer to Registering a location

by scroll mode on page 49.

!:Vicinity Search*

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity

of the cursor.

=For details, refer to Searching for a nearby

POI on page 41.

!:Overlay POI*

Displays icons for surrounding facilities

(POI) on the map.

=For details, refer to Displaying POI on the

map on page 146.

!:Volume*

Displays the “Volume Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Setting the Volume

for Guidance and Phone on page 152.

!:Contacts*

Displays the “Contacts List”screen.

=For details, refer to Calling a number in

the phone book on page 63.

!:Whole Route Overview

Displays the entire route (currently set) with

the “Route Overview”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the route

overview on page 45.

!:Traffic on Route

Displays a list of traffic information on the

route.

=For details, refer to Checking traffic infor-

mation on the route on page 54.

!:Traffic List

Displays a list of traffic events information.

=For details, refer to Checking all traffic in-

formation on page 53.

!:Day/Night Display

Switches Day/Night Display setting.

=For details, refer to Setting the map col-

our change between day and night on

the previous page.

!:Favourites Icon

Switches Favourites Icon setting.

=For details, refer to Setting the display of

icons of favourite locations on page 145.

!:Position Fix

When the vehicle position enters a different

street parallel to the street you are travel-

ling, the vehicle position returns to the

street you are travelling.

4 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Displaying the screen for

system settings

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

pThis can also be operated using the “Short-

cut Menu”screen.

Engb 149

Chapter

Customising preferences

3 Touch [System Settings].

The “System Settings”screen appears.

4 Touch the item that you want to

change the setting.

#If you touch , the previous screen returns.

Customising the regional settings

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [Regional Settings].

The “Regional Settings”screen appears.

Selecting the language

You can set the languages used on the pro-

gramme and voice guidance. Each language

can be set separately.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [Regional Settings].

The “Regional Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Program Language].

The “Select Program Language”screen ap-

pears.

4 Touch the desired language.

After the language is selected, the previous

screen returns.

5 Touch [Voice Language].

The “Voice Language Selection”screen ap-

pears.

6 Touch the desired language.

After the language is selected, the previous

screen returns.

7 Touch [OK] on the “Regional Settings”

screen.

A message confirming whether to restart the

navigation system appears.

8 Touch [OK].

The navigation system restarts.

#If you press the MODE or HOME button, the

setting procedure is cancelled.

Installing additional files for voice

guidance (TTS files)

TTS file is used to read out the street name in

the route guidance by navigation system. If

the latest TTS file is available, you can replace

the current TTS file with the latest one.

pFor AVIC-F40BT, the TTS file will be also

used on the guidance voice of voice recog-

nition.

1 Use your PC to copy the folder named

“Voice”onto the top-most directory of the

SD memory card.

The “Voice”folder is stored on the supplied

CD-ROM. Use your PC to copy it.

Engb

150

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

3 Touch [Voice Language].

The “Voice Language Selection”screen ap-

pears.

4 Touch [Setup Voice].

The “Voice Language Setup”screen appears.

5 Touch [Change Voice Language].

The “Voice Language Selection (SD)”screen

appears.

6 Touch the desired language.

After a while, loading completes and the “Re-

gional Settings”screen returns.

7 Touch [OK] on the “Regional Settings”

screen.

A message confirming whether to restart the

navigation system appears.

8 Touch [OK].

The navigation system restarts.

#If you press the MODE or HOME button, the

setting procedure is cancelled.

Setting the time difference

Adjusts the system’s clock. Set the time differ-

ence (+,–) from the time originally set in your

navigation system.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Regional Settings].

The “Regional Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Time].

The “Time Settings”screen appears.

4 To set the time difference, touch [+] or

[–].

The time difference shows how many hours

differ from the time originally set in the naviga-

tion system (Central European Time) and the

current location of your vehicle. Touching [+]

or [–] changes the time difference display in

half-hour increments.

The time difference can be set from “–4”to

“+9”hours.

5 Touch [Summer Time].

Summer time setting is off by default. Touch

[Summer Time] to change the setting if you

are in the summer time period.

6 Touch [Time format].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!24H (default):

Changes the display to 24-hour format.

!12H:

Changes the display to 12-hour format with

am/pm.

Engb 151

Chapter

Customising preferences

Changing the unit between km and miles

This setting controls the unit of distance and

speed displayed on your navigation system.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Regional Settings].

The “Regional Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [km / mile].

A message confirming whether to change the

setting appears.

4 Touch [Yes].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!km (default):

Shows distance in kilometres.

!mile:

Shows distance in miles.

!Mile&Yard:

Shows distance in miles and yards.

#If you touch [No], the setting is cancelled.

Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle

When calculating the expected time of arrival

and the travel time to the destination, set the

average speed for the motorway or ordinary

roads using [+] and [–].

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Regional Settings].

The “Regional Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Average Speed].

The “Average Speed Settings”screen ap-

pears.

4 Touch [+] or [–] to set the speed.

pThe estimated time of arrival may not be

taken into account other parameters than

this speed value.

5 Touch [OK].

The settings are complete.

Setting the Volume for

Guidance and Phone

The sound volume for the navigation can be

set. You can separately set the volume of the

route guidance and the beep sound.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Volume].

The “Volume Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [+] or [–] to set their volume.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

!Guidance

This setting controls the guidance volume

of navigation.

pWhen set to , guidance is output.

When set to , no guidance is output.

Engb

152

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

!Phone Ringtone

This setting controls the incoming ring tone

volume.

!Phone Voice

This setting controls the incoming voice vo-

lume.

p“Phone Ringtone”and “Phone Voice”ad-

justments are needed only when the mobile

phone featuring Bluetooth technology is

connected.

pVolume of the AV source is adjusted by the

VOL (+/–) button or Multi-control.

=For details, refer to Checking part names

and functions on page 12.

#If you touch the key next to “Beep”, the setting

is changed.

!On (default):

A beep sounds.

!Off:

The beep sound is muted.

#If you touch the key next to “VR Beep”, the set-

ting is changed.

pThis function is available for AVIC-F40BT

only.

Each time you touch the key changes the setting.

!On (default):

Voice recognition beep is enabled.

!Off:

Voice recognition beep is disabled.

4 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Changing the preinstalled

splash screen

You can change the splash screen to the other

images preinstalled in the navigation system.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Splash Screen].

The “Select Splash Screen”screen appears.

3 Touch the image to use as the splash

screen from the list.

The image is displayed on the screen.

4 Touch [OK].

The image is set as the splash screen, and the

“System Settings”screen returns.

Changing to the splash screen

stored in the SD memory card

You can change the splash screen to other

images stored in the SD memory card. Copy

your chosen image to the SD memory card,

and select the image to import.

pSplash screen images should be used with-

in the following formats;

!BMP or JPEG files

!Allowable horizontal and vertical size

are 2 592 pixels x 1 944 pixels or smaller

!Allowable data size is 6 MB or smaller

pProper compatibility with allowable files is

not guaranteed.

pImported original images will be stored in

the built-in memory, but the ability to save

these images cannot be guaranteed com-

pletely. If your original image data is de-

leted, insert the SD memory card again

and re-import the original image.

pThe maximum number of images, includ-

ing the images in the built-in memory, that

can be imported and displayed on the list is

200.

1 Create a folder named “Pictures”on the

top-most directory of the SD memory card.

2 Store the picture files in the “Pictures”

folder.

3 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

4 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

5 Touch [Splash Screen].

The “Select Splash Screen”screen appears.

Engb 153

Chapter

Customising preferences

6 Touch [Select from SD].

The “Select Splash Screen”screen appears.

7 Touch the image to use as the splash

screen from the list.

The image is displayed on the screen.

8 Touch [OK].

The image is set as the splash screen, and the

“System Settings”screen returns.

pImages imported from the SD memory card

are added to the list on “Select Splash

Screen”.

Setting for rear view camera

The following two functions are available. The

rear view camera feature requires a separately

sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC5). (For de-

tails, consult your dealer.)

Rear view camera

The navigation system features a function that

automatically switches to the full-screen

image of the rear view camera installed on

your vehicle. When the gearstick is in the RE-

VERSE (R) position, the screen automatically

switches to full-screen rear view camera

image.

Switching to the “Parking Assist”screen

When the following conditions are met, touch

on the screen of the rear view camera to

switch to the “Parking Assist”screen.

!Vehicle Bus adapter must be connected.

!Your vehicle must be equipped with a park-

ing sensor.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing obstacle detection information on

page 171.

Camera for Rear view mode

Rear view can be displayed at all times (e.g.

when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a

split screen where map information is partially

displayed. Please be aware that with this set-

ting, camera image is not resized to fit, and

that a portion of what is seen by the camera is

not viewable.

=For details, refer to Setting for rear view

camera on this page.

CAUTION

Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which

outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the

screen image may appear reversed.

pImmediately verify whether the display

changes to a rear view camera image when

the gearstick is moved to REVERSE (R)

from another position.

pWhen the screen changes to full-screen

rear view camera image during normal

driving, switch to the opposite setting in

“Polarity”.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Back Camera].

The “Back Camera Settings”screen appears.

3 Touch [Camera].

This changes the setting to “On”.

pYou can only switch to “Rear View”if this

setting is “On”.

4 Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate

setting for polarity.

Each time you touch [Polarity] switches be-

tween the following polarity:

!Battery: When the polarity of the con-

nected lead is positive while the gearstick is

in the REVERSE (R) position

!GND: When the polarity of the connected

lead is negative while the gearstick is in the

REVERSE (R) position

Engb

154

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

Adjusting the response

positions of the touch panel

(touch panel calibration)

If you feel that the touch panel keys on the

screen deviate from the actual positions that

respond to your touch, adjust the response po-

sitions of the touch panel screen.

pDo not use a sharp pointed tool such as a

ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which

could damage the screen.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Screen Calibration].

A message confirming whether to start the ca-

libration appears.

3 Gently touch the centre of + mark dis-

played on the screen.

The target indicates the order.

After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-

tion data is saved.

pDo not turn off the engine while saving the

adjusted position data.

#If you press the MODE button, the previous

adjustment position returns.

#If you press and hold the MODE button, the

adjustment is cancelled.

Setting the illumination colour

The illumination colour can be selected from 8

different colours. Furthermore, the illumina-

tion colour can be switched between these 8

colours in order.

Selecting the colour from the preset

colours

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Illumi Color].

The “Illumination Color”screen appears.

3 Touch the colour you want.

Available options:

!Coloured keys: Selects the desired preset

colour

!Memory 1/Memory 2: Colours registered

in the memory

=For details, refer to Creating a user-de-

fined colour and storing it to memory on

this page.

!Scan: Shifts between the eight default col-

ours in sequence gradually.

!Eco: The colours change in the order of

white, red, amber, yellow, green, and blue

as the number of points in the “Eco Score”

increases.

pThe illumination lights in white when

“Eco Score”is set to “Off”or when no

route is set.

Creating a user-defined colour and

storing it to memory

You can create a user-defined colour and set it

as the illumination colour.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Illumi Color].

The “Illumination Color”screen appears.

3 Touch [Custom].

The “Illumination Color”screen appears.

pIf [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-

lected.

Engb 155

Chapter

Customising preferences

4 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the values for

Red, Green and Blue to create a favourite

colour.

Watch the illumination of hardware keys while

adjusting the colour.

Each time you touch [+]or[–] increases or de-

creases the value of the selected item. +31 to

+00 is displayed as the value is increased or

decreased.

pAn entry cannot be stored with all of the va-

lues set to “+00”.

5 Touch [Memory 1] or [Memory 2] to

store the illumination colour.

6 Touch [OK] to return to the previous

screen.

Checking the version information

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Service Information].

The “Service Information Screen”screen ap-

pears.

3 Check the version information.

Reversing the climate control

status display

If the left/right display of the climate control

status screen does not match that of vehicle,

the display can be reversed.

pTo configure this setting, the optional Vehi-

cle Bus adapter must be connected.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the operating status of the climate

control panel on page 171.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Reverse AC Display].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!Off (default):

The climate control status display is not re-

versed.

!On:

The climate control status display is re-

versed.

Selecting the video for rear

display

pThis function is available for AVIC-F40BT

only.

The setting is fixed at “Mirror AV”for AVIC-

F940BT and AVIC-F840BT.

You can choose either to show the same

image as the front screen or to show the se-

lected source on the rear display.

1 Display the AV operation screen.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

2Tap on the left edge of the screen.

pThe appearance of this key changes accord-

ing to the current setting.

pWhile the tuner is receiving an emergency

announcement, traffic announcement, or

news programme, the current setting can-

not be changed.

Each touch of changes the settings as fol-

lows:

!Mirror AV: The video on the front screen of

the navigation unit is output to the rear dis-

play

!DISC: The video and sound of the DVDs are

output to the rear display

Engb

156

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

!iPod: The video and sound of the iPod are

output to the rear display

!AV1: The video and sound of AV1 are out-

put to the rear display

!AV2: The video and sound of AV2 are out-

put to the rear display

pWhen “Mirror AV”is selected, the following

restrictions are applied to rear display.

—When selecting “Rear View”in the map

display, nothing is displayed.

—All sounds cannot be output for rear dis-

play.

—When playing back video files on the ex-

ternal storage device (USB, SD), the

video image is not output.

pWhen “DISC”is selected, the following re-

striction is applied to rear display.

—When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is

set in the built-in DVD drive, only the

sound is output.

pWhen “iPod”is selected, the following re-

striction is applied to rear display.

—The video image and sound are output

only when the corresponding setting on

“AV1 Input”is “iPod”.

pWhen “AV1”or “AV2”is selected, the fol-

lowing restrictions are applied to rear dis-

play.

—The video image and sound are output

only when “AV1”or “AV2”has both

video and sound.

—The video image and sound are output

only when the corresponding setting on

“AV1 Input”or “AV2 Input”are

“Video”.

Adjusting the picture

CAUTION

For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these

navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-

tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in

a safe place and apply the handbrake. Refer to

Important Information for the User (a separate

manual).

You can adjust the picture for each source and

rear view camera.

1 Press and hold the MODE button.

The “Picture Adjustment”screen appears.

2 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired

item.

!Brightness: Adjusts the black intensity.

!Contrast: Adjusts the contrast.

!Colour: Adjusts the colour saturation.

!Colour Temp.: Adjusts the tone of colour

(which colour is emphasised, red or blue).

!Dimmer: Adjusts the brightness of display.

pTouching [Camera] switches to the picture

adjustment screen for the rear view cam-

era.

pTouching [Source] while adjusting the rear

view camera image returns you to the pre-

vious screen.

pThe adjustments of “Brightness”and

“Contrast”are stored separately when your

vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime) and

when your vehicle’s headlights are on

(nighttime). These are switched automati-

cally depending on whether the vehicle’s

headlights are on or off.

pThe adjustments of “Dimmer”is stored se-

parately when your vehicle’s headlights are

off (daytime) and when your vehicle’s head-

lights are on (nighttime). “Dimmer”is

switched automatically only when the value

of nighttime is lower than the value of day-

time.

pYou cannot adjust “Colour”for the source

without a video and navigation map display.

pThe setting contents can be memorised se-

parately for the following screen and the

video image.

Engb 157

Chapter

Customising preferences

!Audio source

—AM/FM/CD/ROM/iPod (Music)/SD

(audio)/USB (audio)/Bluetooth

audio/source off screen/menu

screens/others

!Video source

—AV1 and iPod (Video)

—DVD-V and DivX

—SD (Video) and USB (Video)

—AV2 (Video)

—Rear view camera image

pWith the AVIC-F840BT, AV2 is not

available. And AVIC-F840BT shows

“AV Input”as “AV1 Input”.

!Map screen

pThe picture adjustment may not be avail-

able with some rear view cameras.

pBecause of the LCD screen characteristics,

you may not be able to adjust the screen at

low temperatures.

3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired

item.

Each touch of [+]or[–] increases or decreases

the level of the desired item.

4 Touch .

The previous screen returns.

Displaying the screen for

AV system settings

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Settings].

The “AV System Settings”menu appears.

4 Touch the item that you want to

change the setting.

#If you touch , the previous screen returns.

Setting video input 1 (AV1)

You can switch this setting according to the

connected component.

pThis setting applies to mini-jack input.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on this page.

2 Touch [AV1 Input].

Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-

ting as follows:

!iPod: iPod connected with the USB Inter-

face cable for iPod (CD-IU51V) (sold sepa-

rately)

!Video: External video component

!Off: No video component is connected.

pAVIC-F840BT shows “AV Input”as “AV1

Input”.

Engb

158

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

pUse “AV1 Input”when connecting CD-

RM10 (sold separately) through the external

video component.

Setting video input 2 (AV2)

pThis function is available for AVIC-F40BT

and AVIC-F940BT.

You can switch this setting according to the

connected component.

pThis setting applies to RCA inputs

(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the

back of the system.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [AV2 Input].

Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-

ting as follows:

!Off: No video component is connected.

!Video: External video component

Changing the wide screen mode

pYou can only adjust “Wide Mode”when se-

lecting an AV source with video.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [Wide Mode].

Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-

ting as follows:

!Full (full)

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal

direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3

TV picture (normal picture) without any

omissions.

!Cinema (cinema)

A picture is enlarged by the same propor-

tion as “Full”or “Zoom”in the horizontal di-

rection and by an intermediate proportion

between “Full”and “Zoom”in the vertical

direction; ideal for a cinema-sized picture

(wide screen picture) where captions lie

outside the frame.

!Zoom (zoom)

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-

portion both vertically and horizontally;

ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide

screen picture).

!Normal (normal)

A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving

you no sense of disparity since its propor-

tions are the same as that of the normal

picture.

pDifferent settings can be stored for each

video source.

pThe same setting is automatically applied

for the following grouping.

!DVD-V and DivX

!AV1 and AV2

pWith the AVIC-F840BT, AV2 is not avail-

able. And AVIC-F840BT shows “AV

Input”as “AV1 Input”.

pWhen viewing videos, select an appropriate

wide screen mode that matches its original

aspect ratio to view it comfortably.

pRemember that use of this system for com-

mercial or public viewing purposes may

constitute an infringement on the author’s

rights protected by the Copyright Law.

pThe followings are always viewed at “Full”.

!Map screen

!Rear view camera image

!Screen of an application available for

Advanced App Mode

Engb 159

Chapter

Customising preferences

Setting the rear output

The navigation system’s rear output can be

used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer

connection. If you switch “Rear SP”to

“Sub. W”, you can connect a rear speaker lead

directly to a subwoofer without using an auxili-

ary amp.

Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear

full-range speaker connection (“Full”).

pBoth rear speaker leads output and RCA

rear output are switched simultaneously in

this setting. (When you use the product

without RCA rear output, this setting only

applies to the rear speaker leads.)

p“Rear SP”can be set only when the source

is selected to “Off”.

pAVIC-F840BT is not compatible with the wir-

ing that the subwoofer is directly con-

nected to rear speaker leads. Always use

the setting with “Full”.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [Rear SP].

Each touch of [Rear SP] changes the settings

as follows:

!Full

When no subwoofer is connected to the

rear output, select “Full”.

!Sub. W

When a subwoofer is connected to the rear

output, select “Sub. W”.

Switching the preout setting

CAUTION

Ensure the output setting of “Preout”is the same

as the speaker connected.

pThis function is available for AVIC-F840BT

only.

You can switch the output setting of the preout

of this navigation system to the subwoofer or

rear speaker.

p“Preout”can be set only when the source

is selected to “Off”.

pIf you set “Rear SP”to “Sub. W”, you can-

not conduct the setting of “Preout”.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [Preout].

Each touch of [Preout] changes the settings

as follows:

!Sub. W (default):

When a subwoofer is connected to the pre-

out outputs (SWL, SWR), select “Sub. W”.

!Rear

When rear speaker is connected to the pre-

out outputs (SWL, SWR), select “Rear”.

Switching the muting/

attenuation timing

You can mute the AV source volume or attenu-

ate the output signal.

pEven if this setting is “Off”, the navigation

system will mute or attenuate the AV

source volume when the mute signal is out-

put via MUTE lead.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [Mute].

Each touch of [Mute] changes the settings as

follows:

AVIC-F40BT

!Guide/Tel/VR: The volume is muted or atte-

nuated according to the following condi-

tions.

—When the navigation outputs the gui-

dance voice.

Engb

160

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

—When you use a mobile phone via

Bluetooth technology (dialling, talking,

incoming call).

—When the voice recognition mode is ac-

tivated.

!Tel/VR: The volume is muted or attenuated

according to the following conditions.

—When you use a mobile phone via

Bluetooth technology (dialling, talking,

incoming call).

—When the voice recognition mode is ac-

tivated.

!Off: The volume does not change.

AVIC-F940BT,AVIC-F840BT

!Guide/Tel: The volume is muted or attenu-

ated according to the following conditions.

—When the navigation outputs the gui-

dance voice.

—When you use a mobile phone via

Bluetooth technology (dialling, talking,

incoming call).

!Tel: The volume is muted or attenuated

when you use a mobile phone via Bluetooth

technology (dialling, talking, incoming call).

!Off: The volume does not change.

pAV source volume returns to normal when

the corresponding action ends.

Switching the muting/

attenuation level

You can select the muting/attenuation level of

“Mute”. This setting is also effective for a

mute signal that has been received from the

MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.

pThis menu is not available when AV source

is “Off”.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [Mute Level].

Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!20dB: The volume becomes 1/10.

!10dB: The volume becomes 1/3.

!All: The volume becomes 0.

pWhen you select “All”, no audio adjust-

ments are possible during the sound is

turned off.

pWhen you select “20dB”or “10dB”,no

audio adjustments are possible during the

sound is attenuated.

pAV source volume returns to normal when

the corresponding action ends.

pEven when a mute signal has been received

from MUTE lead connected to the naviga-

tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannot

be attenuated or muted.

Switching Auto PI seek

The navigation system can automatically

search for a different station with the same

programming, even during preset recall.

p“Auto PI”can be set only when the source

is selected to “Off”.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [Auto PI].

Each touch of [Auto PI] changes the settings

as follows:

!Off (default):

Deactivates the Auto PI seek function.

!On:

Activates the Auto PI seek function.

Setting the FM tuning step

Normally the FM tuning step employed by

seek tuning is 50 kHz. When “AF”or “TA”is

on, the tuning step automatically changes to

100 kHz. But you can set the tuning step to

50 kHz when “AF”or “TA”is on.

p“FM Step”can be set only when the source

is selected to “Off”.

Engb 161

Chapter

Customising preferences

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [FM Step].

Each time you touch [FM Step] will switch the

FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz

while “AF”or “TA”is on.

pThe tuning step remains at 50 kHz during

manual tuning.

Displaying your DivX VOD

registration code

In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)

content on this navigation system, you first

need to register the unit with your DivX VOD

content provider. You do this by generating a

DivX VOD registration code, which you submit

to your provider.

pThis feature is available when the selected

source is CD,ROM,DivX,orDVD-V.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [DivX® VOD].

The screen where you can choose to display a

registration code or deregistration code is dis-

played.

pIf a registration code has already been acti-

vated, it cannot be displayed.

3 Touch [Registration Code].

Your 10-digit registration code is displayed.

pMake a note of the code as you will need it

when you register with a DivX VOD provider.

Displaying your DivX VOD

deregistration code

A registration code registered with a deregis-

tration code can be deleted.

pThis feature is available when the selected

source is CD,ROM,DivX,orDVD-V.

1 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

2 Touch [DivX® VOD].

The screen where you can choose to display a

registration code or deregistration code is dis-

played.

pIf a registration code has not been acti-

vated, the deregistration code is not dis-

played.

3 Touch [Deregistration Code].

Your 8-digit deregistration code is displayed.

pMake a note of the code as you will need it

when you deregister with a DivX VOD provi-

der.

Selecting the smartphone

connection method

In order to use the smartphone application on

this navigation system, you need to select the

method for connecting your smartphone.

=For details, refer to Starting procedure on

page 126.

Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings].

Engb

162

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [AV Sound].

The “AV Sound Settings”screen appears.

pYou cannot make adjustments in the follow-

ing situations:

!AV source is “Off”.

!During muting/attenuation

4 Touch the item that you want to

change the setting.

#If you touch , the previous screen returns.

Using balance adjustment

You can select a fader/balance setting that

provides an ideal listening environment in all

occupied seats.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on the previous page.

2 Touch [FAD/BAL].

When “Sub. W”is selected in “Rear SP”,

[Balance] will be displayed instead of

[FAD/BAL] and front/rear speaker balance

cannot be adjusted.

=For details, refer to Setting the rear output

on page 160.

3 Touch [a]or[b] to adjust front/rear

speaker balance.

Each time you touch [a]or[b], the front/rear

speaker balance moves towards the front or

the rear.

“Front: 15”to “Rear: 15”is displayed as the

front/rear speaker balance moves from front to

rear.

Set “Front:”and “Rear:”to “0”when using a

two-speaker system.

4 Touch [c]or[d] to adjust left/right

speaker balance.

Each time you touch [c]or[d], the left/right

speaker balance moves towards the left or the

right.

“Left: 15”to “Right: 15”is displayed as the

left/right speaker balance moves from left to

right.

Using the equaliser

The equaliser lets you adjust equalisation to

match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics

as desired.

Recalling equaliser curves

There are seven stored equaliser curves that

you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list

of the equaliser curves:

Equaliser curve

S.Bass (Super Bass) is a curve in which only low-

pitched sound is boosted.

Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-

pitched sounds are boosted.

Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-

pitched sounds are slightly boosted.

Engb 163

Chapter

Customising preferences

Equaliser curve

Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the

human vocal range, is boosted.

Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.

Custom1 is an adjusted equaliser curve that you cre-

ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each

source.

Custom2 is an adjusted equaliser curve that you cre-

ate. If you select this curve, the effect is applied to all

AV sources.

pWhen “Flat”is selected, no supplement or

correction is made to the sound. This is

useful to check the effect of the equaliser

curves by switching alternatively between

“Flat”and a set equaliser curve.

pYou cannot select “Custom1”and “Cus-

tom2”when “Auto EQ”is “On”.

=For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-

justed equaliser on the next page.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

2 Touch [EQ].

3 Touch the equaliser you want.

pIf Auto EQ has been set to “On”, an image

corresponding to each equaliser curve you

selected appears.

=For details of the operations, refer to Adjust-

ing the equaliser curve automatically (Auto

EQ) on the next page.

Customising the equaliser curves

You can adjust the currently selected equaliser

curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be

made with a 8-band graphic equaliser.

pThis function is not available when “Auto

EQ”is “On”.

=For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-

justed equaliser on the next page.

The difference between “Custom1”and

“Custom2”

!A separate “Custom1”curve can be cre-

ated for each source. If you make adjust-

ments when a curve “S.Bass (Super Bass)”,

“Powerful”,“Natural”,“Vocal”,“Flat”,or

“Custom1”is selected, the equaliser curve

settings will be memorised in “Custom1”.

!A“Custom2”curve can be created com-

mon to all sources. If you make adjust-

ments when “Custom2”curve is selected,

the “Custom2”curve will be updated.

!The “Custom1”curve is applied to each of

the source selected, but you can apply the

same curve to the following sources.

—AM and FM

—AV1 and AV2

—CD,ROM,DVD-V, and DivX

—SD and USB

—Audio (Bluetooth audio) and aha

(Bluetooth connection)

—iPod and aha (iPhone)

Engb

164

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

pWith the AVIC-F840BT, AV2 is not avail-

able. And AVIC-F840BT shows “AV

Input”as “AV1 Input”.

pThe different curve can be memorised

between iPod and USB.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

2 Touch [EQ].

3 Touch one of the keys to select a curve

that you want to use as the basis of custo-

mising.

4 Touch [Customize].

5 Touch the frequency that you want to

adjust the level.

6 Touch [a]or[b] to adjust the level of

the equaliser band.

Each time you touch [a]or[b], the level of

the equaliser band increases or decreases.

Using the auto-adjusted equaliser

You can set the auto-adjusted equaliser to suit

the vehicle’s acoustics. To use this function,

the vehicle’s acoustics must be measured in

advance.

=For details of the operations, refer to Adjust-

ing the equaliser curve automatically (Auto

EQ) on this page.

pTo manually adjust the equaliser curve, set

“Auto EQ”to “Off”.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

2 Touch [EQ].

3 Touch the key next to “Auto EQ”to

turn the auto-adjusted equaliser on or off.

4 Select the equaliser curve.

Adjusting the equaliser curve

automatically (Auto EQ)

By measuring the vehicle’s acoustics, the

equaliser curve can be adjusted automatically

to suit the interior of the vehicle.

WARNING

A loud tone (noise) may be emitted from the

speakers when measuring the vehicle’s acous-

tics. Never perform the Auto EQ measurement

while driving.

CAUTION

!Thoroughly check the conditions before per-

forming Auto EQ, as the speakers may be da-

maged if this is performed under the following

conditions:

—When the speakers are incorrectly con-

nected. (For example, when a rear speaker

is connected as a subwoofer output.)

—When a speaker is connected to a power

amp delivering output higher than the

speaker’s maximum input power capabil-

ity.

!If the microphone for acoustical measure-

ment (sold separately) is not placed in an ap-

propriate location, the measurement tone may

become loud and measurement may take a

long time, resulting in battery drainage. Be

sure to place the microphone in the specified

location.

Engb 165

Chapter

Customising preferences

Before operating the Auto EQ function

!Perform Auto EQ in as quiet a place as pos-

sible, with the vehicle engine and air condi-

tioning switched off. Also, cut power to car

phones or mobile phones in the vehicle, or

remove them from the vehicle before per-

forming Auto EQ. Sounds other than the

measurement tone (surrounding sounds,

engine sound, telephones ringing, etc.)

may prevent correct measurement of the

vehicle’s acoustics.

!Be sure to perform Auto EQ using the mi-

crophone for acoustical measurement

(sold separately). Using another micro-

phone may prevent measurement, or result

in incorrect measurement of the vehicle’s

acoustics.

!To perform Auto EQ, the front speakers

must be connected.

!When this navigation system is connected

to a power amp with input level control,

Auto EQ may not be able to be performed if

the power amp’s input level is set below

the standard level.

!When this navigation system is connected

to a power amp with an LPF, turn the LPF

off before performing Auto EQ. Also, set

the cut-off frequency for the built-in LPF of

an active subwoofer to the highest fre-

quency.

!The distance has been calculated by com-

puter to provide the optimum delay to en-

sure accurate results. Do not change this

value.

—The reflected sound within the vehicle is

strong and delays occur.

—The LPF on active subwoofers or exter-

nal amps delay the lower sounds.

!If an error occurs during measurement, a

message appears and measurement is

cancelled. Check the following before mea-

suring the vehicle’s acoustics.

—Front speakers (left/right)

—Rear speakers (left/right)

—Noise

—Microphone for acoustical measure-

ment (sold separately)

—Low battery

Performing Auto EQ

pAuto EQ changes the audio settings as fol-

lows:

!“Auto EQ”on the “EQ Menu”screen is

set to “On”.

=For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-

justed equaliser on the previous

page.

!The fader/balance settings return to the

centre position.

=For details, refer to Using balance ad-

justment on page 163.

!The equaliser curve switches to “Flat”.

=For details, refer to Using the equali-

ser on page 163.

!The front and rear speakers will automa-

tically be adjusted to a high pass filter

setting.

pPrevious settings for Auto EQ will be over-

written.

pFor AVIC-F40BT users

Do not press the hbutton to open or close

the panel when you are using the micro-

phone.

1 Stop the vehicle in a place that is quiet,

close all the doors, windows and sun roof,

and then turn the engine off.

If the engine is left running, engine noise may

prevent correct Auto EQ.

pIf driving restrictions are detected during

measurement, measurement is cancelled.

2 Fix the microphone for acoustical mea-

surement (sold separately) in the centre of

the headrest of the driver’s seat, facing for-

ward.

The Auto EQ may differ depending on where

you place the microphone. If desired, place

the microphone on the front passenger seat

and perform Auto EQ.

Engb

166

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

3 Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC.

If the vehicle’s air conditioner or heater is

turned on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the

air conditioner or heater may prevent correct

Auto EQ.

4 Switch the AV source to “Off”.

=For details of the operations, refer to Dis-

playing the AV operation screen on page 72.

5 Set the video setting for the rear dis-

play to “Mirror AV”.

=For details of the operations, refer to Select-

ing the video for rear display on page 156.

pThis function is available for AVIC-F40BT

only.

6 Display the “AV System Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV system settings on page 158.

7 Touch [Auto EQ Meas.].

The “Auto EQ Measurement”screen ap-

pears.

8 Plug the microphone into the mini-jack

connector.

USB and mini-jack connector

Microphone for acoustical measurement (sold sepa-

rately)

9 Touch [Start].

A 10-second countdown starts.

10 Exit the vehicle and keep the door

closed until the countdown finishes.

When the countdown is over, a measurement

tone (noise) is emitted from the speakers and

the Auto EQ measurement begins.

11 Wait until the measurement is com-

pleted.

When Auto EQ is completed, a message is dis-

played indicating that the measurement is

completed.

pIf the vehicle’s acoustics cannot be mea-

sured correctly, an error message will be

displayed.

pThe measurement time varies depending

on the type of vehicle.

pTo stop the measurement, touch [Stop].

12 Touch [OK].

13 Store the microphone carefully in the

glove compartment or another safe place.

If the microphone is subjected to direct sun-

light for an extended period of time, high tem-

peratures may cause distortion, colour change

or malfunction.

Engb 167

Chapter

Customising preferences

Using sonic centre control

Sound that is suited for the listening position

can easily be created with this function.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

2 Touch [Sonic Center Control].

3 Touch [c]or[d] to select a listening po-

sition.

pThe larger the value of the range: “Left7”to

“Right7”setting, the greater the delay of

the speaker output.

pWhen “Left”is set, the left speaker output

is delayed. When “Right”is set, the right

speaker output is delayed.

Adjusting loudness

Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the

low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

2 Touch [Loudness].

Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is

selected in the following order:

Off —Low —Mid —High

Using subwoofer output

The navigation system is equipped with a sub-

woofer output mechanism, which can be

turned on or off.

pThis function is not available when “Sub

Woofer”is “Off”.

pWith the AVIC-F840BT, this setting is not

available when “Rear SP”is set to “Full”

and “Preout”is set to “Rear”.

=For details, refer to Setting the rear out-

put on page 160.

=For details, refer to Switching the preout

setting on page 160.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

2 Touch [Sub Woofer].

3 Touch [On].

The subwoofer output is turned on.

#If you touch [Off], the subwoofer output is

turned off.

4 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select

the phase of subwoofer output.

5 Touch [+] or [–] next to “Level”to adjust

the output level.

“+6”to “–24”is displayed as the level is in-

creased or decreased.

6 Touch [c]or[d] next to

“Frequency(Hz)”to select cut-off fre-

quency.

Each time you touch [c]or[d], cut-off fre-

quencies are selected in the following order:

50Hz —63Hz —80Hz —100Hz —125Hz

Only frequencies lower than those in the se-

lected range are output from the subwoofer.

Using the high pass filter

When you cut lower sounds from the subwoo-

fer output frequency, activate HPF (high pass

filter). Only frequencies higher than those in

the selected range are output from the front or

rear speakers.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

Engb

168

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

2 Touch [HPF].

Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-

quencies in the following order:

Off —50Hz —63Hz —80Hz —100Hz —

125Hz

Adjusting source levels

SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust

the volume level of each source to prevent ra-

dical changes in volume when switching be-

tween sources.

pSettings are based on the FM tuner volume

level, which remains unchanged.

pYou cannot select [SLA] when the FM tuner

is selected as the AV source.

1 Compare the FM tuner volume level

with the level of the source you wish to ad-

just.

2 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

3 Touch [SLA].

4 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vo-

lume.

“+8dB”to “–8dB”is displayed as the source

volume is increased or decreased.

The following AV sources are set to the same

source level adjustment volume automatically.

!CD,ROM, and DivX

!SD and USB

!Audio (Bluetooth audio) and aha

(Bluetooth connection)

!iPod and aha (iPhone)

!AV1 and AV2

pWith the AVIC-F840BT, AV2 is not available.

And AVIC-F840BT shows “AV Input”as

“AV1 Input”.

pThe different source volume level can be set

between iPod and USB.

Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)

You can enhance bass sounds that are often

muted by driving noise.

1 Display the “AV Sound Settings”

screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

AV sound settings on page 162.

2 Touch [Bass Booster].

3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the range from

0to6.

Replicating the settings

You can import settings you have made on the

utility programme NavGate FEEDS which is

available separately to the navigation system.

1 Use NavGate FEEDS to replicate the set-

tings and store them on an SD memory

card.

2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD

card slot.

=For details of the operation, refer to Insert-

ing and ejecting an SD memory card on

page 16.

3 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

4 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

5 Touch [Setting Replicator].

A message confirming whether to update the

settings appears.

6 Touch [Yes].

Update starts.

After the settings are updated, a message con-

firming whether to restart the navigation sys-

tem appears.

7 Touch [OK].

The navigation system restarts.

Engb 169

Chapter

Customising preferences

Setting the safe mode

For safety reasons, you can limit the functions

that are available while your vehicle is in mo-

tion.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [Safe Mode].

Each time you touch the key changes the set-

ting.

!On (default):

Activates the safe mode function.

!Off:

Deactivates the safe mode function.

Turning off the screen

By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,

you can turn off the screen display without

turning off the voice guidance.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

3 Touch [Screen Off].

The screen is turned off.

pTouch anywhere on the screen to turn it

back on.

Engb

170

Chapter

27 Customising preferences

By connecting the optional Vehicle Bus adap-

ter, you can display the operation status of the

vehicle’s parking sensor function and climate

control panel on the navigation screen.

CAUTION

!For information on installing the Vehicle Bus

adapter, see the operating manual of the Vehi-

cle Bus adapter.

!After installing the Vehicle Bus adapter, be

sure to check operations.

!For details about vehicle models that are com-

patible with Vehicle Bus adapters, refer to the

information on our website.

!Functions and displays vary depending on the

vehicle model. For details about the functions

available according to model, refer to the in-

formation on our website.

Displaying obstacle

detection information

CAUTION

This function is intended solely to assist the dri-

ver’s vision. It does not detect all dangers and ob-

stacles and is not a substitute for your

attentiveness, judgement, and care while parking

your vehicle.

Turn on the parking assist sensor on your vehi-

cle, and the navigation screen will switch to

the “Parking Assist”screen.

pThis function is available only for vehicles

equipped with a parking sensor system.

pThe “Parking Assist”screen is not dis-

played until the navigation screen has

started.

1Displays the position of detected obstacles.

2The previous screen returns.

3Switches the display to the rear view camera

image.

pThe display switches only when the rear

view camera setting is set to “On”and

the gearstick is in the REVERSE (R)

position.

Displaying the operating

status of the climate

control panel

When you operate the climate control panel of

the vehicle, the navigation screen switches

automatically to the “Climate”screen.

pThe settings of the climate control panel

operated before the navigation system is

started are not displayed on the screen.

pAny climate control panel settings of the

vehicle that are turned off are not displayed

on the screen.

pIf the information displayed on the naviga-

tion screen is reversed for the left and right

sides of the vehicle, change the “Reverse

AC Display”setting to “On”.

=For details of the operations, refer to Re-

versing the climate control status display

on page 156.

Engb 171

Chapter

Displaying the operation status of vehicle equipment

34521

1Displays that the rear window heating setting

is on.

2Displays that the front window heating setting

is on.

3Displays that the internal circulation mode

setting is on.

4Displays that the A/C setting is on.

5Displays that the dual A/C function is on.

6Displays the seat heating setting for the right

seat.

7Displays the internal temperature setting for

the right seat.

8Displays the fan speed.

9Displays the fan direction.

aThe previous screen returns.

pIf you do not operate the climate control

panel for a few seconds, the previous

screen is displayed automatically.

bDisplays the internal temperature setting for

the left seat.

cDisplays the seat heating setting for the left

seat.

Engb

172

Chapter

Displaying the operation status of vehicle equipment

pThis function is available for AVIC-F40BT

only.

To ensure safe driving

CAUTION

For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the

voice operation as much as possible while driv-

ing.

The voice operation is available when “Voice

Language”is set to one of the following lan-

guages:

!UK English/UK English (Serena):TTS

!Español/Español (Monica):TTS

!Deutsch/Deutsch (Steffi):TTS

!Français/Français (Virginie):TTS

!Italiano/Italiano (Silvia):TTS

!Nederlands/Nederlands (Claire):TTS

=For details, refer to Selecting the language

on page 150.

Basics of the voice operation

Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest

in voice recognition technology. You can use

voice commands to operate many of its func-

tions. This chapter describes where you can

use voice commands, and also what com-

mands the system accepts.

You can use voice commands to operate the

following functions:

!Hands-free phoning

!Switching the AV source

Flow of the voice operation

You can start the voice operation any time

even when the map screen is displayed or AV

is operating. (Some operations are not avail-

able.) The basic steps of the voice operations

are as follows.

1Switch the screen to map screen or AV op-

eration screen.

2Press the button to activate voice opera-

tions.

3Speak a command into the microphone

after the beep.

When the command is recognised, the na-

vigation system displays next options on

the screen, and pronounces it in some

cases.

4Repeat previous step as necessary.

5The requested operation will be carried out.

pThe voice operation may not be operable for a

minute after the navigation system has booted

up.

pThe voice operation will be activated 30 sec-

onds after the map screen is displayed.

If the button does not respond, display the

disclaimer screen and then touch [OK]. The

map screen is displayed.

Starting the voice operation

%Press the button when the map

screen or the AV operation screen is dis-

played.

The voice operation screen appears.

Engb 173

Chapter

Operating your navigation system with voice

1Voice help menu

Displays a list of commands for the voice

operation.

2Voice operation condition indicator

When is indicated, the navigation sys-

tem can recognise your voice commands.

Touch to listen to the brief operating in-

struction.

Touch to cancel the voice operation.

pYou can cancel the voice operation feature

at any time by saying “Cancel”. After you

cancel voice operations, the display returns

to the screen displayed before the voice op-

eration screen appeared.

How to use the voice operation

Calling the entry on the phone book

A method for dialling the entry named

“Nancy”is described here along with an op-

erational example.

1 Press the MODE button to display the

map screen or the AV operation screen.

2 Press the button to activate voice

operations.

3 Say “Call Nancy”to make a call.

A message confirming whether to dial ap-

pears.

4 Say “Yes”.

Dialling starts.

Engb

174

Chapter

29 Operating your navigation system with voice

Available basic voice commands

The navigation system can also recognise the words in the following list.

pTerms written in italics are voice commands.

Basic commands

Voice commands and operations

Back dThe previous screen returns.

Cancel dCancels the voice operation.

Help dOutputs the brief operating instruction by voice.

Next page,Previous page dSwitches the page.

Last page,First page dSwitches to the last or first page.

Voice operation for AV source

AV source selection

Voice commands and operations

Change Source to DISC dSwitches the AV source to Disc.

Change Source to FM dSwitches the AV source to FM.

Change Source to AM dSwitches the AV source to AM.

Change Source to SD dSwitches the AV source to SD.

Change Source to USB dSwitches the AV source to USB.

Change Source to iPod dSwitches the AV source to iPod.

Change Source to Bluetooth audio dSwitches the AV source to Audio (Bluetooth audio).

Built-in DVD drive, external storage device (USB, SD)

Voice commands and operations

Shuffle play dPlays all songs randomly.

Pause dPauses the track or file currently playing.

Resume dResumes the track or file currently playing.

Next song dPlays the next track or file.

Previous song dPlays the previous track or file, or returns to the beginning of the track or file currently playing.

Engb 175

Chapter

Operating your navigation system with voice

Voice commands related to hands-free phoning

pYou can make a phone call by voice dialling if the mobile phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is being

paired with the navigation system.

pFor <entry’s name> shown on the following chart, say the name of the entry stored in “Contacts”.

pFor <phone number> shown on the following chart, say the desired phone number.

Voice commands and operations

Call <entry’s name> dMakes a call to the entry (*1).

Call <entry’s name> General dDisplays the message confirming whether to dial dSay Yes dDials the general

phone number of the entry (*2).

Call <entry’s name> Mobile dDisplays the message confirming whether to dial dSay Yes dDials the mobile

phone number of the entry (*2).

Call <entry’s name> Home dDisplays the message confirming whether to dial dSay Yes dDials the home

phone number of the entry (*2).

Call <entry’s name> Office dDisplays the message confirming whether to dial dSay Yes dDials the office

phone number of the entry (*2).

Call <entry’s name> Other dDisplays the message confirming whether to dial dSay Yes dDials the other

phone number of the entry (*2).

Call <phone number> dDisplays the message confirming whether to dial dSay Yes dDials the phone number.

Make a call dSay the phone number you want to call dDisplays the message confirming whether to dial dSay

Yes dThe system starts dialling to the number.

Make a call dSay the name of entry stored on “Contacts”you want to call dDisplays the message confirming

whether to dial dSay Yes dThe system starts dialling to the number (*1).

(*1) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone num-

ber.

(*2) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry. In

such case, say the type of phone number.

Tips for the voice operation

For your voice commands to be correctly re-

cognised and interpreted, ensure that condi-

tions are suitable for recognition.

Close the vehicle windows

Please note that wind through the vehicle win-

dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the

vehicle can interfere with voice operation.

Position the microphone carefully

For optimum pick-up, the microphone should

be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front

of the driver.

Pause before giving a command

Speaking too soon may cause the recognition

to fail.

Pronounce your commands carefully

Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.

Engb

176

Chapter

29 Operating your navigation system with voice

Setting the anti-theft function

You can set a password for the navigation sys-

tem. If the back-up lead is cut after the pass-

word is set, the navigation system prompts for

the password at the time of next boot up.

Setting the password

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings].

The “Settings Menu”screen appears.

pThis can also be operated using the “Short-

cut Menu”screen.

3 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and

then touch and hold Area3.

Area1 Area2 Area3

4 Touch [Set Password].

The password setting screen appears.

pWhen the AVIC-F940BT or the AVIC-F840BT

is being installed and a password has not

been set up, the password setting screen is

displayed when the detachable faceplate is

detached and re-attached.

5 Enter the password you want to set.

p5 to 16 characters can be entered for a

password.

6 Touch [OK].

7 Reenter the password to confirm the

setting.

8 Touch [OK].

Password protection is applied.

pIf you want to change the password cur-

rently set, enter the current password and

then enter the new one.

Entering the password

On the password input screen, you must enter

the current password. If you enter an incorrect

password three times, the screen is locked

and operations using touch panel keys are dis-

abled.

1 Enter the password.

2 Touch [OK].

If you enter the correct password, the naviga-

tion system will be unlocked.

Deleting the password

The current password can be deleted.

1 Press the HOME button to display the

“Top Menu”screen.

2 Touch [Settings] on the “Top Menu”.

3 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and

then touch and hold Area3.

4 Touch [Clear password].

The password setting screen appears.

5 Enter the current password.

6 Touch [OK].

7 Touch [Yes].

The message for deletion appears and then

the current password is deleted.

Forgotten password

Contact the nearest authorised Pioneer Ser-

vice Station.

Engb 177

Chapter

Other functions

Returning the navigation

system to the default or

factory settings

You can return settings or recorded content to

the default or factory settings. There are some

methods to clear user data, and the situations

and the cleared content are different for each

method. For information regarding the content

that is cleared by each method, see the list

presented later.

Method 1: Remove the vehicle battery

This transforms the system into the same

state as when the navigation system is unin-

stalled.

Method 2: Touch [Restore Factory

Settings]

=For details, refer to Restoring the default set-

ting on this page.

Method 3: Touch [Clear user information]

on the “Select Items to Reset”screen

=For details, refer to Returning the navigation

system to the initial state on this page.

Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the “Select

Items to Reset”screen

=For details, refer to Returning the navigation

system to the initial state on this page.

Restoring the default setting

Resets various settings registered to the navi-

gation system and restores them to the default

or factory settings.

pBe sure to read “Setting items to be deleted”

before you perform this operation.

=For details, refer to Setting items to be

deleted on the next page.

1 Display the “System Settings”screen.

=For details, refer to Displaying the screen for

system settings on page 149.

2 Touch [Restore Factory Settings].

The message confirming whether to restore

the settings appears.

3 Touch [Yes].

Returning the navigation

system to the initial state

You can return settings or recorded content to

the default or factory settings.

pBe sure to read “Setting items to be deleted”

before you perform this operation.

=For details, refer to Setting items to be

deleted on the next page.

1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and

apply the handbrake.

2 Turn the ignition switch off and back

on.

The navigation system restarts, and the splash

screen appears.

3 Press and hold the MODE button and

the TRK (m) button while the splash

screen appears.

pFor users of AVIC-F40BT, press the MODE

button and the TRK (c) button.

The “Select Items to Reset”screen appears.

4 Touch [Clear user information] or

[Reset].

The message confirming whether to erase the

data appears.

5 Touch [Yes].

The recorded contents are cleared.

Engb

178

Chapter

30 Other functions

Setting items to be deleted

The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method. The items listed in the following table re-

turn to the default or factory settings. Any items not listed below will be retained.

—: The setting will be retained.

1: The setting will be cleared and returned to the default or factory settings.

pBold indicates functions or command names.

!Method 1: Remove the vehicle battery

!Method 2: Touch [Restore Factory Settings]

!Method 3: Touch [Clear user information] on the “Select Items to Reset”screen

!Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the “Select Items to Reset”screen

Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Map function

View mode and scale setting on

the map

——11

Direction of the map ——11

Last cursor position on the map

screen

—111

Route setting

Current route 1—11

Guidance state of the current

route

——11

Vehicle position information ——11

Options —111

Others

Keyboard —111

Learnt data used in Learning

Route 1—11

Shortcut Menu —111

Safe Mode —111

Destination

Point registered in Favourites ——1—

History ——1—

Stored city history ——1—

Traffic Settings Displayed Traffic Info —111

Map Settings View Mode ——11

Other settings —111

Navi Settings

3D Calibration Status ————

Demo Mode 1111

Set Home ——1—

Modify Current Location ——11

Other settings —111

Engb 179

Chapter

Other functions

Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

System Settings

Program Language,Voice

Language ——11

Time ——11

Back Camera 1———

Other settings —111

Bluetooth Set-

tings All settings (*1) —111

Phone Menu All settings (*1) —111

Other functions Anti-theft password ————

(*1) All stored data of 5 users is deleted.

AV functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Volume 1———

AV Settings Wide Mode,Mute 1—11

Other settings 1———

AV Sound All settings 1———

CD,ROM,DVD-V,

DivX,FM,AM,

Audio (Bluetooth

audio)

All settings (*2) 1———

SD,USB All settings (*2) 1—11

Other functions

Picture Adjustment 1———

Tilt 1———

(*2) All settings including the setting on the “Function”menu are deleted.

Engb

180

Chapter

30 Other functions

Troubleshooting

If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common

problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. If a solution to your problem

cannot be found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorised Pioneer service facility.

Problems with the navigation screen

Symptom Cause Action (Reference)

The power doesn’t turn on. The

navigation system doesn’t oper-

ate.

Leads and connectors are incor-

rectly connected.

Confirm once more that all connections are

correct.

The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then

replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-

rect fuse with the same rating.

Noise and other factors are causing

the built-in microprocessor to oper-

ate incorrectly.

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off

the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off

(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and

turn the power to the navigation system back

on.

You cannot position your vehicle

on the map without a significant

positioning error.

The GPS aerial is in an unsuitable

location.

The quality of signals from the GPS satellites

is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-

racy. Check the GPS signal reception and the

position of the GPS aerial if necessary.

Obstacles are blocking signals from

the satellites.

The quality of signals from the GPS satellites

is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-

racy. Check the GPS signal reception and the

position of the GPS aerial if necessary, or con-

tinue driving until reception improves. Keep

the aerial clean.

The position of satellites relative to

your vehicle is inadequate.

The quality of signals from the GPS satellites

is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-

racy. Continue driving until reception im-

proves.

Signals from the GPS satellites have

been modified to reduce accuracy.

(GPS satellites are operated by the

US Department of Defense, and the

US government reserves the right to

distort positioning data for military

reasons. This may lead to greater

positioning errors.)

The quality of signals from the GPS satellites

is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-

racy. Wait until reception improves.

If a vehicle phone or mobile phone

is used near the GPS aerial, GPS re-

ception may be lost temporarily.

The quality of signals from the GPS satellites

is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-

racy. When using a mobile phone, keep the

aerial of the mobile phone away from the

GPS aerial.

Engb 181

Appendix

Symptom Cause Action (Reference)

You cannot position your vehicle

on the map without a significant

positioning error.

Something covers the GPS aerial. Do not cover the GPS aerial with spray paint

or vehicle wax, because this may block the re-

ception of GPS signals. Snow buildup can

also degrade the signals.

Signals from the vehicle’s speed

pulse are not being picked up prop-

erly.

Check that the cables are properly connected.

If necessary, consult the dealer that installed

the system.

The navigation system may not be

mounted securely in your vehicle.

Check that the navigation system is securely

mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer

that installed the system.

The navigation system is installed

with an extreme angle exceeding

the installation angle limitations.

Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-

tion system must be installed within the al-

lowed installation angle. For details, refer to

Installation Manual.)

Indication of the position of your ve-

hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or

reversing.

Check whether or not the reverse gear signal

input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The

navigation system works properly without the

lead connected, but positioning accuracy will

be adversely affected.)

“Eco Graph”is not available. The navigation system is unable to

obtain past average fuel mileage

data, so “Eco Graph”cannot be dis-

played.

Drive about 10 km on a road without obstruc-

tions. Then park your vehicle in a safe place,

turn off the navigation system and turn the

power to the navigation system back on.

The map colour does not switch

automatically between daytime

and nighttime.

“Day/Night Display”is set to

“Day”.

Check “Day/Night Display”setting and

make sure “Automatic”is selected. (Page

148)

The orange/white lead is not con-

nected.

Check the connection.

The screen is too bright. Picture quality adjustment of the

display is not correct.

Adjust the picture quality. (Page 157)

The display is very dim. The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and

“Automatic”is selected on “Day/

Night Display”.

Read about “Day/Night Display”setting

and, if desired, select “Day”. (Page 148)

Picture quality adjustment of the

display is not correct.

Adjust the picture quality. (Page 157)

No sounds of AV source are pro-

duced.

The volume level will not rise.

The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.

The attenuator or mute is on. Turn the attenuator or mute off.

A speaker lead is disconnected. Check the connection.

The volume of navigation gui-

dance and beeps cannot be ad-

justed.

VOL (+/–) button or Multi-control is

used to adjust the volume.

Turn the volume up or down using “Volume”

on the “System Settings”menu. (Page 152)

The person on the other end of

the phone call cannot hear the

conversation due to an echo.

The voice from the person on the

other end of the phone call is output

from the speakers and then picked

up by the microphone again, creat-

ing an echo.

Use the following methods to reduce the

echo:

—Lower the volume on the receiver

—Have both parties pause slightly before

speaking

Engb

182

Appendix

Symptom Cause Action (Reference)

There’s no picture. The handbrake cord is not con-

nected.

Connect the handbrake cord, and apply the

handbrake.

The handbrake is not applied. Connect the handbrake cord, and apply the

handbrake.

The backlight of the LCD panel is

turned off.

Turn on the backlight. (Page 170)

Rear display picture disappears. The source disc being listened to in

the navigation system has been

ejected.

Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.

This problem may occur when certain con-

nection methods are used.

There is a problem with the rear dis-

play, for example a faulty wiring con-

nection.

Check the rear display and its connection.

An AV source that cannot output to

the rear display is selected.

Select an appropriate AV source.

Nothing is displayed and the

touch panel keys cannot be

used.

The setting for the rear view camera

is incorrect.

Select the appropriate setting for the rear

view camera.

The gearstick was placed in [R]

when the rear view camera was not

connected.

Select the correct polarity setting for “Back

Camera”. (Page 154)

There is no response when the

touch panel keys are touched, or

a different key responds.

The touch panel keys deviate from

the actual positions that respond to

your touch for some reason.

Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 155)

The external storage device

(USB, SD) cannot be used.

The USB storage device has been

removed immediately after plugging

it.

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off

the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off

(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and

turn the power to the navigation system back

on.

Problems in the AV screen

Symptom Cause Action (Reference)

CD or DVD playback is not pos-

sible.

The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

The disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

The disc is cracked or otherwise da-

maged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

The files on the disc are an irregular

file format.

Check the file format.

The disc format cannot be played

back.

Replace the disc.

The loaded disc is a type this system

cannot play.

Check what type of disc it is. (Page 196)

The screen is covered by a cau-

tion message and the video can-

not be shown.

The handbrake lead is not con-

nected or applied.

Connect the handbrake lead correctly, and

apply the handbrake.

The handbrake interlock is acti-

vated.

Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply

the handbrake.

Engb 183

Appendix

Symptom Cause Action (Reference)

No video output from connected

equipment.

No video output from connected

iPod.

“AV1 Input”or “AV2 Input”setting

is incorrect.

Correct the settings. (Page 135)

The connection of the USB interface

cable for iPod is incorrect.

Connect both the USB plug and the RCA

cable side. (If only one of these connection

has been made, the iPod will not work prop-

erly.) (Page 20)

The audio or video skips. The navigation system is not firmly

secured.

Secure the navigation system firmly.

No sounds are produced.

The volume level will not rise.

Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.

The system is performing still, slow

motion, or frame-by-frame playback

with DVD-Video.

There is no sound during still, slow motion, or

frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.

The system is paused or performing,

fast reverse or forward during the

disc playback.

For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),

there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.

The icon 9is displayed, and op-

eration is not possible.

The operation is not compatible

with the video configuration.

This operation is not possible. (For example,

the DVD playing does not feature that angle,

audio system, subtitle language, etc.)

The picture stops (pauses) and

the navigation system cannot be

operated.

The reading of data is impossible

during disc playback.

Stop playback once, and start playback again.

The picture is stretched, with in-

correct aspect ratio.

The aspect setting is incorrect for

the display.

Select the appropriate setting for that image.

(Page 159, Page 105)

A parental lock message is dis-

played and DVD playback is not

possible.

Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the level.

(Page 105)

Parental lock for DVD playback

cannot be cancelled.

The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 105)

Playback is not with the audio

language and subtitle language

settings selected in “DVD/

DivX® Setup”.

The DVD playing does not feature

dialogue or subtitles in the lan-

guage selected in “DVD/DivX®

Setup”.

Switching to a selected language is not possi-

ble if the language selected in “DVD/DivX®

Setup”is not recorded on the disc. (Page

104)

The picture is extremely unclear/

distorted and dark during play-

back.

The disc features a signal to prohibit

copying. (Some discs may have

this.)

Since the navigation system is compatible

with the copy guard analogue copy protect

system, the picture may suffer from horizon-

tal stripes or other imperfections when a disc

with that kind of protection signal is viewed

on some displays. This does not mean the na-

vigation system is malfunctioning.

iPod cannot be operated. The iPod is frozen. !Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface

cable for iPod.

!Update the iPod software version.

An error has occurred. !Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface

cable for iPod.

!Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn

off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to

off (ACC OFF). Then start the engine again,

and turn the power to the navigation system

back on.

!Update the iPod software version.

Engb

184

Appendix

Problems with the phone screen

Symptom Cause Action (Reference)

Dialling is not possible because

the touch panel keys for dialling

are inactive.

Your phone is out of range for ser-

vice.

Retry after re-entering the range for service.

The connection between the mobile

phone and the navigation system

cannot be established now.

Perform the connection process.

If the screen becomes frozen...

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off

the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off

(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and

turn the power to the navigation system back

on.

Engb 185

Appendix

Messages for navigation functions

The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to

identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action.

There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a

case, follow the instructions given on the display.

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Route calculation was not

possible.

Route calculation has failed be-

cause of a malfunction in map data,

software, or hardware.

!Change the destination.

!Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-

sage persists.

Route calculation not possi-

ble: destination is too far.

The destination is too far. Set a destination closer to the starting point.

Route calculation not possi-

ble: destination is too close.

The destination is too close. Set a destination farther from the starting

point.

Route calculation not possi-

ble: navigation cannot be pro-

vided around destination or

starting point.

The destination, waypoint(s), or

starting point are in an area where

no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and

the route calculation is impossible.

!Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.

!Reset the destination after you drive the ve-

hicle to any road.

Route to destination cannot

be calculated.

The destination or waypoint(s) are in

an isolated island, etc. without a

ferry and the route calculation is im-

possible. If there is no road con-

nected to your starting point or

destination, this message will ap-

pear.

Change the destination.

Failed to make the route pro-

file.

In rare cases, a route calculation

error may occur.

!Retry.

!Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-

sage persists.

No picture folder. Save jpeg

file to /Pictures/ folder

Cannot load the image because

“Pictures”folder is not found in the

inserted external storage device.

Use appropriate data and store it correctly.

(Page 153)

“Pictures”folder exists on the SD

memory card but there is no load-

able data in the folder.

Use appropriate data and store it correctly.

(Page 153)

Data Read error. Failed to read the data for some rea-

son.

Use appropriate data and store it correctly.

(Page 153)

The file is corrupt The data is damaged or an attempt

was made to set an image file that

was not made to specifications as

the splash screen.

Use appropriate data and store it correctly.

(Page 153)

Engb

186

Appendix

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Connection failed. The mobile phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology is turned off.

Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology.

The mobile phone is paired (con-

nected) with another device.

Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.

Rejection has been received from

the mobile phone.

Operate the target phone and accept the con-

nection request from the navigation system.

(Furthermore, check the connection settings

on your mobile phone.)

The target mobile phone cannot be

found.

Check whether your mobile phone is acti-

vated and, whether the distance to your mo-

bile phone is not too far.

Could not find any available

phone.

No available phone exists in the sur-

roundings when the system

searches for connectable mobile

phones featuring Bluetooth wireless

technology.

!Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology.

!Check whether your mobile phone is acti-

vated and, whether the distance to your mo-

bile phone is not too far.

Registration failed. The mobile phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology is turned off during

the registration step.

Keep turning the target phone’s Bluetooth

wireless technology on during the registra-

tion.

Rejection by the mobile phone has

received.

Operate the target phone and accept the re-

gistration request from the navigation system.

(Furthermore, check the connection settings

on your mobile phone.)

Registration step has failed for

some reason.

Retry the registration and if the registration

still fails, try registering using your mobile

phone.

Engb 187

Appendix

Messages for audio functions

When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer

to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error

persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service centre.

The messages in “()”will appear on the rear display.

Built-in DVD drive

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Reading error

(ERROR-02-XX)

Dirty Clean the disc.

Scratched disc Replace the disc.

The disc is loaded upside down. Check that the disc is loaded correctly.

Playback error. Please remove

the disc.

There is an electrical or mechanical

error.

!Replace the disc.

!Set the ACC to off and then set it to on

again.

Region code cannot be

matched (DIFFERENT REGION

DISC)

The disc does not have the same re-

gion number as the navigation sys-

tem.

Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the

correct region number.

Unreadable disc (UNPLAYABLE

DISC)

This type of disc cannot be played

by the navigation system.

Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-

tem can play. (Page 199, Page 215)

Playback error due to irregu-

lar temperature. Please re-

move the disc. (THERMAL

PROTECTION IN MOTION)

The temperature of the navigation

system is out of the normal operat-

ing range.

Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to

within normal operating limits.

Tracks that cannot be played

back will be skipped (FILE

SKIPPED)

Files that are protected by digital

rights management (DRM).

The protected files are skipped.

Cannot play back all tracks

(PROTECTED DISC)

All the files on the inserted disc are

secured by DRM.

Replace the disc.

Flash write error. Unable to

write to flash memory. (CAN

NOT SAVE DATA)

The playback history for VOD con-

tents cannot be saved for some rea-

son.

!Retry.

!If the message appears frequently, consult

your dealer.

Your device is not authorised

to play this protected DivX

video. (YOUR DEVICE IS NOT

AUTHORIZED TO PLAY THIS

DivX PROTECTED VIDEO)

The device does not match the de-

vice registered with the VOD provi-

der. VOD content cannot be played

back.

Check whether this device has been regis-

tered with the VOD provider.

Video resolution not sup-

ported. (VIDEO RESOLUTION

NOT SUPPORTED)

High definition (HD) DivX video can-

not be played.

Create playable one and retry.

SD/USB/iPod

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Tracks that cannot be played

back will be skipped

Files that are protected by digital

rights management (DRM).

The protected files are skipped.

This type of file cannot be played by

this unit.

Replace it with the playable file. (Page 199,

Page 215)

Engb

188

Appendix

Message Cause Action (Reference)

Cannot play back all tracks All the files on the inserted external

storage device are secured by DRM.

Store playable files.

All of the files cannot be played by

this unit.

Replace it with the playable file. (Page 199,

Page 215)

USB flash drive was discon-

nected for device protection.

Do not connect this USB flash

drive to the unit. To restart

USB, restart the unit.

The USB connector or USB cable is

short-circuited.

Confirm that the USB connector or USB

cable is not caught in something or da-

maged.

The connected USB storage device

consumes more than maximum al-

lowable current.

Disconnect the USB storage device and do

not use it. Turn the ignition switch to off, then

back ACC to on or turn the ignition switch on

and then connect the compliant USB storage

device.

The USB interface cable for iPod is

short-circuited.

Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or

USB cable is not caught in something or da-

maged.

Authorization failure. iPod is

not connected.

The iPod is not compatible with this

navigation system.

Use an iPod of a compatible version.

Communication failure !Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod

main menu is displayed, connect the cable

again.

!If the message appears frequently, consult

your dealer.

Engb 189

Appendix

Positioning technology

Positioning by GPS

The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a

network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each

of the satellites, which orbit at a height of

21 000 km, continually broadcasts radio sig-

nals giving time and position information. This

ensures that signals from at least three can be

picked up from any open area on the earth’s

surface.

The accuracy of the GPS information depends

on how good the reception is. When the sig-

nals are strong and reception is good, GPS

can determine latitude, longitude and altitude

for accurate positioning in three dimensions.

But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-

sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained

and positioning errors are somewhat greater.

Positioning by dead reckoning

The built-in sensor in the navigation system

also calculates your position. The current loca-

tion is measured by detecting driving distance

with the speed pulse, the turning direction

with the gyro sensor and inclination of the

road with the G sensor.

The built-in sensor can even calculate

changes of altitude, and correct the discrepan-

cies in the distance travelled caused by driving

along winding roads or up slopes.

If you use this navigation system with connect-

ing the speed pulse, the system will become

more accurate than no connection of speed

pulse. So you connect the speed pulse without

fail to get the accuracy of positioning.

pThe position of the speed detection circuit

vary depending on the vehicle model. For

details, consult your authorised Pioneer

dealer or an installation professional.

pSome types of vehicles may not output a

speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-

metres per hour. In such a case, the current

location of your vehicle may not be dis-

played correctly while in traffic jam or in a

car park.

How do GPS and dead

reckoning work together?

For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-

tem continually compares GPS data with your

estimated position as calculated from the data

of built-in sensor. However, if only the data

from the built-in sensor is available for a long

period, positioning errors are gradually com-

pounded until the estimated position becomes

unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-

nals are available, they are matched with the

data of the built-in sensor and used to correct

it for improved accuracy.

pIf you use chains on your wheels for winter

driving or put on the spare wheel, errors

may suddenly increase because of differ-

ence in wheel diameter. Initialise the sen-

sor status and it may recover the accuracy

to normal condition.

=For details, refer to Clearing status on

page 137.

Engb

190

Appendix

Map matching

As mentioned, the positioning systems used

by this navigation system are susceptible to

certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-

sion, place you in a location on the map where

no road exists. In this situation, the processing

system understands that vehicles travel only

on roads, and can correct your position by ad-

justing it to a nearby road. This is called map

matching.

With map matching

Without map matching

Handling large errors

Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by

combining GPS, dead reckoning and map

matching. However, in some situations, these

functions may not work properly, and the error

may become bigger.

When positioning by GPS is

impossible

!GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-

not be received from more than two GPS

satellites.

!In some driving conditions, signals from

GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.

In this case, it is impossible for the system

to use GPS positioning.

In tunnels or en-

closed parking

garages

Under elevated

roads or similar

structures

When driving

among high build-

ings

When driving through

a dense forest or tall

trees

!If a car phone or mobile phone is used near

the GPS aerial, GPS reception may be lost

temporarily.

!Do not cover the GPS aerial with spray

paint or car wax, because this may block

the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup

can also degrade the signals, so keep the

aerial clear.

pIf a GPS signal has not been received for a

long time, your vehicle’s actual position

and the current position mark on the map

may diverge considerably or may not be up-

dated. In such case, once GPS reception is

restored, accuracy will be recovered.

Engb 191

Appendix

Conditions likely to cause

noticeable positioning errors

For various reasons, such as the state of the

road you are travelling on and the reception

status of the GPS signal, the actual position of

your vehicle may differ from the position dis-

played on the map screen.

!If you make a slight turn.

!If there is a parallel road.

!If there is another road very nearby, such

as in the case of an elevated motorway.

!If you take a recently opened road that is

not on the map.

!If you drive in zigzags.

!If the road has a series of hairpin bends.

!If there is a loop or similar road configura-

tion.

!If you take a ferry.

!If you are driving on a long, straight road or

a gently curving road.

Engb

192

Appendix

!If you are on a steep mountain road with

many height changes.

!If you enter or exit a multi-storey car park or

similar structure using a spiral ramp.

!If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-

milar structure.

!If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a

rough track or in snow.

!If you put on chains, or change your tyres

for ones with a different size.

!If trees or other obstacles block the GPS

signals for a considerable period.

!If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-

stop manner, as in a traffic jam.

!If you join the road after driving around a

large car park.

!When you drive around a roundabout.

!When starting driving immediately after

starting the engine.

Engb 193

Appendix

Route setting information

Route search specifications

Your navigation system sets a route to your

destination by applying certain built-in rules to

the map data. This section provides some use-

ful information about how a route is set.

CAUTION

When a route is calculated, the route and voice

guidance for the route are automatically set.

Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-

mation about traffic regulations applicable at the

time when the route was calculated is consid-

ered. One-way streets and street closures may

not be taken into consideration. For example, if a

street is open during the morning only, but you

arrive later, it would be against the traffic regula-

tions so you cannot drive along the set route.

When driving, please follow the actual traffic

signs. Also, the system may not know some traf-

fic regulations.

!The calculated route is one example of the

route to your destination decided by the na-

vigation system while taking the type of

streets or traffic regulations into account. It

is not necessarily an optimum route. (In

some cases, you may not be able to set the

streets you want to take. If you need to take

a certain street, set a waypoint on that

street.)

!If the destination is too far, there may be in-

stances where the route cannot be set. (If

you want to set a long-distance route going

across several areas, set waypoints along

the way.)

!During voice guidance, turns and intersec-

tions from the motorway are announced.

However, if you pass intersections, turns,

and other guidance points in rapid succes-

sion, some may delay or not be announced.

!It is possible that guidance may direct you

off a motorway and then back on again.

!In some cases, the route may require you

to travel in the opposite direction to your

current heading. In such cases, you are in-

structed to turn around, so please turn

around safely by following the actual traffic

rules.

!In some cases, a route may begin on the

opposite side of a railway or river from your

actual current location. If this happens,

drive towards your destination for a while,

and try route calculation again.

!When there is a traffic jam ahead, a detour

route may not be suggested if driving

through the traffic jam would still be better

than taking the detour.

!There may be instances when the starting

point, the waypoint and the destination

point are not on the highlighted route.

!The number of roundabout exits displayed

on the screen may differ from the actual

number of roads.

Route highlighting

!Once set, the route is highlighted in bright

colour on the map.

!The immediate vicinity of your starting

point and destination may not be high-

lighted, and neither will areas with particu-

larly complex road layouts. Consequently,

the route may appear to be cut off on the

display, but voice guidance will continue.

Auto reroute function

!If you deviate from the set route, the system

will re-calculate the route from that point

so that you remain on track to the destina-

tion.

!This function may not work under certain

conditions.

Handling and care of discs

Some basic precautions are necessary when

handling your discs.

Engb

194

Appendix

Built-in drive and care

!Use only conventional, fully circular discs.

Do not use shaped discs.

!Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or

otherwise damaged discs as they may da-

mage the built-in drive.

!When using discs that can be printed on

label surfaces, check the instructions and

the warnings of the discs. Depending on

the discs, inserting and ejecting may not

be possible. Using such discs may result in

damage to this equipment.

!Do not touch the recorded surface of the

discs.

!Store discs in their cases when not in use.

!Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-

onments including under direct sunlight.

!Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-

micals to the surface of the discs.

!Do not attach commercially available labels

or other materials to the discs.

—The discs may warp making the disc un-

playable.

—The labels may come off during play-

back and prevent ejection of the discs,

which may result in damage to the

equipment.

!To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,

moving outward from the centre.

!Condensation may temporarily impair the

built-in drive’s performance. Leave it to ad-

just to the warmer temperature for about

one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a

soft cloth.

!Playback of discs may not be possible be-

cause of disc characteristics, disc format,

recorded application, playback environ-

ment, storage conditions and so on.

!Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.

!Read the precautions for discs before

using them.

Ambient conditions for playing

a disc

!At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-

ture cutout protects this product by switch-

ing it off automatically.

!Despite our careful design of the product,

small scratches that do not affect actual

operation may appear on the disc surface

as a result of mechanical wear, ambient

conditions for use or handling of the disc.

This is not a sign of the malfunction of this

product. Consider it to be normal wear and

tear.

Playable discs

DVD-Video and CD

DVD and CD discs that display the logos

shown below generally can be played on this

built-in DVD drive.

DVD-Video

Engb 195

Appendix

pis a trademark of DVD Format/Logo

Licensing Corporation.

pIt is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.

This DVD drive may not be able to play all

discs bearing the marks shown above.

AVCHD recorded discs

This unit is not compatible with discs recorded

in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-

nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If

inserted, the disc may not be ejected.

Playing DualDisc

!DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a

recordable CD for audio on one side and a

recordable DVD for video on the other.

!Playback of the DVD side is possible with

this navigation system. However, since the

CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-

patible with the general CD standard, it

may not be possible to play the CD side

with this navigation system.

!Frequent loading and ejecting of a

DualDisc may result in scratches to the

disc.

!Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-

blems on this navigation system. In some

cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in

the disc-loading slot and will not eject. To

prevent this, we recommend you refrain

from using DualDisc with this navigation

system.

!Please refer to the manufacturer for more

detailed information about DualDiscs.

Dolby Digital

This product will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-

nals internally and the sound will be output in

stereo.

pManufactured under licence from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby”and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Detailed information for

playable media

Compatibility

Common notes about disc compatibility

!Certain functions of this product may not

be available for some discs.

!Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-

teed.

!It is not possible to playback DVD-ROM/

DVD-RAM discs.

!Playback of discs may become impossible

with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-

peratures, or depending on the storage

conditions in the vehicle.

DVD-Video discs

!DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-

gion numbers cannot be played on this

DVD drive. The region number of the player

can be found on this product’s chassis.

DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual

Layer) discs

!Unfinalised discs which have been re-

corded with the Video format (video mode)

cannot be played back.

!Discs which have been recorded with the

Video Recording format (VR mode) cannot

be played back.

!DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have

been recorded with Layer Jump recording

cannot be played back.

!For detailed information about recording

mode, please contact the manufacturer of

media, recorders, or writing software.

Engb

196

Appendix

CD-R/CD-RW discs

!Unfinalised discs cannot be played back.

!It may not be possible to playback CD-R/

CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-

corder or a personal computer because of

disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on

the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation

on the lens of the built-in drive.

!Playback of discs recorded on a personal

computer may not be possible, depending

on the recording device, writing software,

their settings, and other environmental fac-

tors.

!Please record with the correct format. (For

details, please contact manufacturer of

media, recorders, or writing software.)

!Titles and other text information recorded

on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-

played by this product (in the case of audio

data (CD-DA)).

!Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW

discs before using them.

Common notes about the external

storage device (USB, SD)

!Do not leave the external storage device

(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-

peratures.

!Depending on the kind of the external sto-

rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-

tion system may not recognise the storage

device or files may not be played back prop-

erly.

!The text information of some audio and

video files may not be correctly displayed.

!File extensions must be used properly.

!There may be a slight delay when starting

playback of files on an external storage de-

vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-

chies.

!Operations may vary depending on the

kind of an external storage device (USB,

SD).

!It may not be possible to play some music

files from SD or USB because of file char-

acteristics, file format, recorded applica-

tion, playback environment, storage

conditions, and so on.

USB storage device compatibility

=For details about USB storage device com-

patibility with this navigation system, refer

to Specifications on page 215.

!Protocol: bulk

!You cannot connect a USB storage device

to this navigation system via a USB hub.

!Partitioned USB storage device is not com-

patible with this navigation system.

!Firmly secure the USB storage device when

driving. Do not let the USB storage device

fall onto the floor, where it may become

jammed under the brake or accelerator

pedal.

!There may be a slight delay when starting

playback of audio files encoded with image

data.

!Some USB storage devices connected to

this navigation system may generate noise

on the radio.

!Do not connect anything other than the

USB storage device.

The sequence of audio files on USB sto-

rage device

For USB storage device, the sequence is differ-

ent from that of USB storage device.

SD memory card and SDHC memory card

=For details about SD memory card compat-

ibility with this navigation system, refer to

Specifications on page 215.

Handling guidelines and

supplemental information

!This system is not compatible with Multi

Media Card (MMC).

!Copyright protected files cannot be played

back.

Engb 197

Appendix

Notes specific to DivX files

!Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-

ner sites are guaranteed for proper opera-

tion. Unauthorised DivX files may not

operate properly.

!DRM rental files cannot be operated until

playing back is started.

!The navigation system corresponds to a

DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43

seconds. Search operations beyond this

time limit are prohibited.

!DivX VOD file playback requires supplying

the ID code of this navigation system to the

DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,

refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registra-

tion code on page 162.

!Plays all versions of DivX video, except for

DivX 7 with standard playback of DivX

media files.

!For more details about DivX, visit the follow-

ing site:

http://www.divx.com/

DivX subtitle files

!Srt format subtitle files with the extension

“.srt”can be used.

!Only one subtitle file can be used for each

DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be

associated.

!Subtitle files that are named with the same

character string as the DivX file before the

extension are associated with the DivX file.

The character strings before the extension

must be exactly the same. However, if there

is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in

a single folder, the files are associated even

if the file names are not the same.

!The subtitle file must be stored in the same

folder as the DivX file.

!Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any

more subtitle files will not be recognised.

!Up to 64 characters can be used for the

name of the subtitle file, including the ex-

tension. If more than 64 characters are

used for the file name, the subtitle file may

not be recognised.

!The character code for the subtitle file

should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-

acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the

characters to be displayed incorrectly.

!The subtitles may not be displayed correctly

if the displayed characters in the subtitle

file include control code.

!For materials that use a high transfer rate,

the subtitles and video may not be comple-

tely synchronised.

!If multiple subtitles are programmed to dis-

play within a very short time frame, such as

0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-

played at the correct time.

Engb

198

Appendix

Media compatibility chart

General

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-RW/-R

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File system

ISO9660 level 1,

ISO9660 level 2,

Romeo and Joliet

ISO9660 level 1,

ISO9660 level 2,

Romeo, Joliet

and UDF 1.02

FAT16/FAT32

Maximum number of

folders 700 300

Maximum number of

files 999 3 500 2 500

Playable file types MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX MP3, WMA, AAC, WAVE, H.264, MPEG4,

WMV

Note:

Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the external storage device (USB, SD): 7.5 h (450 minutes)

MP3 compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-RW/-R

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension .mp3

Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR

Sampling frequency 16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

for emphasis) 8 kHz to 48 kHz

ID3 tag ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4

Notes:

!Ver. 2.x of ID3 tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.

!The navigation system is not compatible with the following:

MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist

Engb 199

Appendix

WMA compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-RW/-R

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension .wma

Bit rate 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

Note:

The navigation system is not compatible with the following:

Windows Media™Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice

WAV compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-RW/-R

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension

WAV files on the CD-R/-RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R

DL cannot be played.

.wav

Format Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM

Sampling frequency LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz

IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and 44.1 kHz

Quantisation bits LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits

MS ADPCM: 4 bits

Note:

The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.

AAC compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-RW/-R

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension .m4a

Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz 8 kHz to 48 kHz

Note:

The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.

Engb

200

Appendix

DivX compatibility

Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-RW/-R

USB storage de-

vice SD memory card

File extension .avi/.divx

DivX files on the external storage device

(USB, SD) cannot be played.

Profile (DivX version) Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/Ver. 5.x/

Ver. 6.x

Compatible audio codec MP3, Dolby Digital

Bit rate (MP3) 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR

Sampling frequency

(MP3)

16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

for emphasis)

Maximum image size 720 pixels × 576 pixels

Maximum file size 4 GB

Notes:

!The navigation system is not compatible with the following:

DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec

!Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight

delay in the start of playback on discs.

!If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.

!Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.

!Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and

10.08 Mbps for DVDs.

Engb 201

Appendix

Video files compatibility (USB, SD)

File extension .avi .mp4, .m4v .wmv

Format MPEG-4 MPEG-4 H.264 WMV

Compatible video codec MPEG-4 MPEG-4 H.264 WMV

Compatible audio codec

Linear PCM

(LPCM), IMA-

ADPCM

MP3

AAC AAC WMA

Recommended

video specifica-

tions

Image size: QVGA

(320 pixels x 240

pixels)

Bit rate:

768 kbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate:

768 kbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate:

384 kbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate:

384 kbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Maximum bit rate:

Image size:

WQVGA

(400 pixels x 240

pixels)

Bit rate: 2 Mbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate: 2 Mbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate: 1 Mbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate:

768 kbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Image size: VGA

(640 pixels x 480

pixels)

Bit rate: 1 Mbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate: 1 Mbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate:

576 kbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Bit rate:

576 kbps

Frame rate:

30 fps

Maximum file size 2 GB

Maximum playback time 150 minutes

Common notes

!The navigation system may not operate cor-

rectly, depending on the application used

to encode WMA files.

!Depending on the version of Windows

Media™Player used to encode WMA files,

album names and other text information

may not be correctly displayed.

!There may be a slight delay when starting

playback of audio files encoded with image

data.

!The navigation system is not compatible

with packet write data transfer.

!This navigation system can recognise up to

32 characters, beginning with the first char-

acter, including extension for the file and

folder name. Depending on the display

area, the navigation system may try to dis-

play them with a reduced font size. How-

ever, the maximum number of the

characters that you can display varies ac-

cording to the width of each character, and

of the display area.

!Folder selection sequence or other opera-

tions may be altered, depending on the en-

coding or writing software.

!Regardless of the length of blank section

between the songs of original recording,

compressed audio discs play with a short

pause between songs.

Engb

202

Appendix

Example of a hierarchy

The following figure is an example of the tier

structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-

ure indicate the order in which folder numbers

are assigned and the order to be played back.

: Folder

:File

l 1 L

l 2 L

l 3 L

l 4

Notes

!This product assigns folder numbers. The user

cannot assign folder numbers.

!If there is a folder that does not contain any

playable file, the folder itself will display in the

folder list but you cannot check any files in

the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,

these folders will be skipped without display-

ing the folder number.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-

nectivity technology that is developed as a

cable replacement for mobile phones, hand-

held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-

ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits

voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per

second. Bluetooth was launched by a special

interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc.,

Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in

1998, and it is currently developed by nearly

2 000 companies worldwide.

!The Bluetooth®word mark and logos are re-

gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by

PIONEER CORPORATION is under licence.

Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

SD and SDHC logo

SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

microSD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C,

LLC.

Engb 203

Appendix

WMA/WMV

Windows Media is either a registered trade-

mark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States and/or other countries.

pThis product includes technology owned by

Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used

or distributed without a licence from

Microsoft Licensing, Inc.

DivX

DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-

ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, LLC, a

subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This unit can

play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/

ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the

same terminology as DVD video, individual

DivX video files are called “Titles”. Keep in

mind that when naming flies/titles on a CD-R/

RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, they

will by played in written order by default.

pDivX®, DivX Certified®and associated logos

are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its

subsidiaries and are used under licence.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX®is a digital

video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary

of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX

Certified®device that plays DivX video. Visit

divx.com for more information and software

tools to convert your files into DivX videos.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This

DivX Certified®device must be registered in

order to play purchased DivX Video-on-De-

mand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registra-

tion code, locate the DivX VOD section in

Displaying your DivX VOD registration code.Go

to vod.divx.com for more information on how

to complete your registration.

=For details, refer to Displaying your DivX

VOD registration code on page 162.

AAC

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and

refers to an audio compression technology

standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-

eral applications can be used to encode AAC

files, but file formats and extensions differ de-

pending on the application which is used to

encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-

coded by iTunes.

Android™

Android is a trademark of Google Inc.

Detailed information

regarding connected iPod

devices

CAUTION

!Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost

from an iPod, even if that data is lost while

using the navigation system. Please back up

your iPod data regularly.

!Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-

tended amounts of time. Extended exposure

to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-

tion due to the resulting high temperature.

!Do not leave the iPod in any location with

high temperatures.

!Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not

let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-

come jammed under the brake or accelerator

pedal.

For details, refer to the iPod manuals.

iPod and iPhone

Engb

204

Appendix

“Made for iPod”and “Made for iPhone”mean

that an electronic accessory has been de-

signed to connect specifically to iPod or

iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by

the developer to meet Apple performance

standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of

this device or its compliance with safety and

regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with

iPod or iPhone may affect wireless perfor-

mance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and

iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

iTunes

iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

Using app-based connected

content

IMPORTANT

Requirements to access app-based connected

content services using this product:

!Latest version of the Pioneer compatible con-

nected content application(s) for the smart-

phone, available from the service provider,

downloaded to your iPhone device.

!A current account with the content service

provider.

!Smartphone Data Plan.

Note: if the Data Plan for your smartphone

does not provide for unlimited data usage, ad-

ditional charges from your carrier may apply

for accessing app-based connected content

via 3G and/or EDGE networks.

!Connection to the Internet via 3G, EDGE or

Wi-Fi network.

!Optional Pioneer adapter cable connecting

your iPhone to the Pioneer navigation system.

Limitations:

!Access to app-based connected content will

depend on the availability of cellular and/or

Wi-Fi network coverage for the purpose of al-

lowing your smartphone to connect to the In-

ternet.

!Service availability may be geographically lim-

ited to the region. Consult the connected con-

tent service provider for additional

information.

!Ability of this product to access connected

content is subject to change without notice

and could be affected by any of the following:

compatibility issues with future firmware ver-

sions of smartphone; compatibility issues with

future versions of the connected content ap-

plication(s) for the smartphone; changes to or

discontinuation of the connected Content ap-

plication(s) or service by its provider.

Aha Radio

Aha, Aha Radio and the Aha and Aha Radio

logos are either the trademarks or the regis-

tered trademarks of Harman International In-

dustries, Incorporated.

Engb 205

Appendix

Using the LCD screen correctly

Handling the LCD screen

!When the LCD screen is subjected to direct

sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-

come very hot, resulting in possible da-

mage to the LCD screen. When not using

this navigation system, avoid exposing it to

direct sunlight as much as possible.

!The LCD screen should be used within the

temperature ranges shown in Specifica-

tions.

!Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures

higher or lower than the operating tem-

perature range, because the LCD screen

may not operate normally and could be da-

maged.

!The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-

crease its visibility within the vehicle.

Please do not press strongly on it as this

may damage it.

!Do not push the LCD screen with excessive

force as this may scratch it.

!Never touch the LCD screen with anything

besides your finger when operating the

touch panel functions. The LCD screen can

scratch easily.

Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen

!If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air

conditioner, make sure that air from the air

conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from

the heater may break the LCD screen, and

cool air from the cooler may cause moist-

ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-

sulting in possible damage.

!Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)

may appear on the LCD screen. These are

due to the characteristics of the LCD

screen and do not indicate a malfunction.

!The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is

exposed to direct sunlight.

!When using a mobile phone, keep the aer-

ial of the mobile phone away from the LCD

screen to prevent disruption of the video in

the form of disturbances such as spots or

coloured stripes.

Maintaining the LCD screen

!When removing dust from the LCD screen

or cleaning it, first turn the system power

off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.

!When wiping the LCD screen, take care not

to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or

abrasive chemical cleaners.

LED (light-emitting diode)

backlight

A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-

play to illuminate the LCD screen.

!At low temperatures, using the LED back-

light may increase image lag and degrade

the image quality because of the character-

istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will

improve with an increase in temperature.

!The product lifetime of the LED backlight is

more than 10 000 hours. However, it may

decrease if used in high temperatures.

!If the LED backlight reaches the end of its

product lifetime, the screen will become

dimmer and the image will no longer be

visible. In that case, please consult your

dealer or the nearest authorised Pioneer

Service Station.

Engb

206

Appendix

Display information

Destination Menu

Page

Address 36

Return Home 39

POI

Petrol Station

Open Parking Area

Cash Dispenser

Hotel or Motel

Spell Name 40

Near Me 41

Near Destination 41

Around City 41

navgate FEEDS 42

Favourites 42, 49

History 43, 52

Cancel Route 48

Traffic 53

Coordinates 43

Route Overview 45

Phone Menu

Page

Dial Pad 62

Call Home 63

Contacts 63

Contacts Transfer 66

Received Calls 64

Dialled Calls 64

Missed Calls 64

Engb 207

Appendix

Settings Menu

Page

Navi Settings 136

System Settings 149

AV Settings 158

AV Sound 162

Map Settings 142

Bluetooth Settings 67

Setting Replicator 169

Safe Mode 170

Navi Settings menu

Page

Connection Status 136

3D Calibration Status 137

Fuel cons. 138

Drive Log Settings 140

Demo Mode 140

Set Home 141

Modify Current Location 141

Eco Settings 141

Engb

208

Appendix

System Settings menu

Page

Regional Settings

Program Language

Voice Language

150

Time 151

km / mile 152

Average Speed 152

Volume 152

Splash Screen 153

Back Camera 154

Screen Calibration 155

Illumi Color 155

Service Information 156

Reverse AC Display 156

Restore Factory Settings 178

Map Settings menu

Page

Displayed Info

Close Up View 143

City Map 143

City Map Barrier 143

Show Speed Limit 144

Show Traffic Incident 144

Bluetooth Connected 144

Current Street Name 144

Favourites Icon 145

3D Land Mark 145

Show Manoeuvre 146

Show Eco Meter 146

Quick Access Selection 149

Overlay POI 146

View Mode 32

Day/Night Display 148

AV Guide Mode 148

Road Colour 148

Engb 209

Appendix

Bluetooth Settings menu

Page

Connection 60

Registration 57

Device Name 67

Password 68

Bluetooth On/Off 68

Echo Cancel 68

Page

Auto Answer Preference 68

Refuse All Calls 69

Sort Order 67

Clear Memory 69

Firmware update 70

AV System Settings menu

Page

AV1 Input (*1) 158

AV2 Input (*1) 159

AV Input (*2) 158

Preout (*2) 160

Wide Mode 159

Auto EQ Meas. 165

Mute 160

Mute Level 161

Rear SP 160

DivX® VOD 162

Page

Auto PI 161

FM Step 161

App Connection 126

p(*1) These functions are available for AVIC-

F40BT and AVIC-F940BT.

p(*2) These functions are available for AVIC-

F840BT.

Engb

210

Appendix

AV Sound Settings menu

Page

FAD/BAL (Balance) 163

EQ 163

Loudness 168

Sub Woofer 168

HPF 168

SLA 169

Bass Booster 169

Sonic Center Control 168

Engb 211

Appendix

Glossary

AAC

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and

refers to an audio compression technology

standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.

Aspect ratio

This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.

A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.

Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of

16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional

presence and atmosphere.

Bit rate

This expresses data volume per second, or bps

units (bits per second). The higher the rate,

the more information is available to reproduce

the sound. Using the same encoding method

(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better

the sound.

Built-in sensor

The built-in sensor that enables the system to

estimate your vehicle’s position.

CD-DA

This stands for a general music CD (commer-

cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this

word is sometime used for a distinction be-

tween data CDs (which include compressed

audio files) and general music CDs.

Chapter

Titles of DVD-Video are in turn divided into

chapters which are numbered in the same

way as the chapters of a book. With discs fea-

turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired

scene with chapter search.

Current location

The present location of your vehicle; your cur-

rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-

angle mark.

Destination

A location you choose as the end point of your

journey.

DivX

DivX is a popular media technology created by

DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.

DivX media files contain highly compressed

video with high visual quality that maintains a

relatively small file size. DivX files can also in-

clude advanced media features like menus,

subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many

DivX media files are available for download on-

line, and you can create your own using your

personal content and easy-to-use tools from

DivX.com.

DivX Certified®

DivX Certified®products are officially tested by

the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all

versions of DivX video, except for DivX 7.

Favourites

A frequently visited location (such as your

workplace or a relative’s home) that you can

GPS

Global Positioning System. A network of satel-

lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-

ety of purposes.

Guidance point

These are important landmarks along your

route, generally intersections. The next gui-

dance point along your route is indicated on

the map by the yellow flag icon.

Home location

Your registered home location.

ID3 tag

This is a method of embedding track-related

information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-

formation can include the track title, the ar-

tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,

the year of production, comments and other

data. The contents can be freely edited using

software with ID3 tag editing functions.

Although the tags are restricted by the num-

ber of characters, the information can be

viewed when the track is played back.

Engb

212

Appendix

ISO 9660 format

This is the international standard for the for-

mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.

For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations

for the following two levels:

!Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (the name

consists of up to eight characters, half-byte

English capital letters, half-byte numerals

and the “_”sign, with a file-extension of

three characters).

!Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 characters

(including the separation mark “.”and a file

extension). Each folder contains less than

eight hierarchies.

!Extended formats

Joliet:

File names can have up to 64 characters.

Romeo:

File names can have up to 128 characters.

JPEG

This stands for Joint Photographic Experts

Group, and is an international still image com-

pression standard.

MP3

MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an

audio compression standard established by a

working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-

tional Organization for Standardization). MP3

is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th

the size of a conventional disc.

MPEG

This stands for Moving Pictures Experts

Group, and is an international video image

compression standard.

Multi-angle

With regular TV programmes, although multi-

ple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot

scenes, only images from one camera at a

time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs

feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-

ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.

Multi-audio (Multilingual dialogue)

Some videos feature dialogue recorded in mul-

tiple languages or audio recorded in multiple

tracks. For example, dialogue in up to eight

languages can be recorded on a single

DVD-Video, letting you choose the language

as desired.

Multi-session

Multi-session is a recording method that al-

lows additional data to be recorded later.

When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or

CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is

treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-

sion is a method of recording more than two

sessions in one disc.

Multi-subtitle

For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages

can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting

you choose as desired.

Packet write

This is a general term for a method of writing

individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-

quired, just as is done with files on floppy or

hard disks.

Parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-

iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-

vents children from viewing such scenes. With

this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental

lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for

children will be disabled, or these scenes will

be skipped.

Phone book

An address book on user’s phone is collec-

tively referred to as “Phone book”. Depending

on the mobile phone, the phone book may be

called a name such as “Contacts”,“Business

card”or something else.

Point Of Interest (POI)

Any of a range of locations stored in the data,

such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,

and amusement parks.

Engb 213

Appendix

Region number

DVD players and DVD discs feature region

numbers indicating the area in which they

were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-

sible unless it features the same region num-

ber as the DVD player.

Route setting

The process of determining the ideal route to a

specific location; route setting is done auto-

matically by the system when you specify a

destination.

Set route

The route marked out by the system to your

destination. It is highlighted in bright colour

on the map.

Title

DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, en-

abling recording of multiple videos on a single

disc. If, for example, one disc contains three

separate videos, they are divided into title 1,

title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the conve-

nience of title search and other functions.

Track log

Your navigation system logs routes that you al-

ready passed through if the track logger is ac-

tivated. This recorded route is called a “track

log”. It is handy when you want to check a

route travelled or if returning along a complex

route.

VBR

VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally

speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more

widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit

rate according to the needs of audio compres-

sion, it is possible to produce compression-

priority data.

Voice guidance

The giving of directions by navigation voice

while in guidance.

Waypoint

A location that you choose to visit before your

destination; a journey can be built up from

multiple waypoints and the destination.

WMA

WMA is short for Windows Media™Audio and

refers to an audio compression technology

that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.

WMA data can be encoded by using Windows

Media Player version 7 or later.

Engb

214

Appendix

Specifications

General

Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC

(allowable voltage range:

12.0 V to 14.4 V DC)

Earthing system ....................... Negative type

Maximum current consumption

........................................... 10.0 A

Dimensions (W × H × D):

AVIC-F40BT

DIN

Chassis ..................... 188 mm × 118 mm ×

157 mm

Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 28 mm

Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×

165 mm

Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 20 mm

AVIC-F940BT

DIN

Chassis ..................... 188 mm × 118 mm ×

157 mm

Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 20 mm

Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×

165 mm

Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 12 mm

AVIC-F840BT

DIN

Chassis ..................... 188 mm × 118 mm ×

157 mm

Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 20 mm

Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×

165 mm

Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 12 mm

Weight:

AVIC-F40BT ....................... 2.7 kg

AVIC-F940BT .................... 2.4 kg

AVIC-F840BT .................... 2.4 kg

NAND flash memory ............. 4GB

Navigation

GPS receiver:

System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS

SPS (Standard Positioning

Service)

Reception system .......... 32-channel multi-channel

reception system

Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz

Sensitivity .......................... –140 dBm (typ)

Position update frequency

........................................... Approx. once per second

GPS aerial:

Aerial ................................... Micro strip flat aerial/right-

handed helical polarisation

Aerial cable ...................... 3.55 m

Dimensions (W × H × D)

........................................... 33 mm × 14.7 mm × 36 mm

Weight ................................ 73.7 g

Display

Screen size/aspect ratio:

AVIC-F40BT ....................... 7 inch wide/16:9

AVIC-F940BT .................... 6.1 inch wide/16:9

AVIC-F840BT .................... 6.1 inch wide/16:9

Effective display area:

AVIC-F40BT ....................... 156.6 mm × 81.6 mm

AVIC-F940BT .................... 136.2 mm × 72 mm

AVIC-F840BT .................... 136.2 mm × 72 mm

Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)

Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving

Backlight ..................................... LED

Colour system ........................... PAL/NTSC compatible

Tolerable temperature range:

Power on ............................ –10 °C to +60 °C

Power off ............................ –20 °C to +80 °C

Angle adjustment

AVIC-F40BT ....................... 0° to 22°

AVIC-F940BT .................... 0°

AVIC-F840BT .................... 0°

Audio

Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4

50 W × 2 ch/4 W+70W×

1 ch/2 W(for subwoofer)

Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,

5 %THD, 4 WLOAD, Both

Channels Driven)

Load impedance ...................... 4W(4 Wto 8 W[2 Wfor 1 ch]

allowable)

Preout output level (max):

AVIC-F40BT ....................... 4.0 V

AVIC-F940BT .................... 2.2 V

AVIC-F840BT .................... 2.2 V

Preout impedance:

AVIC-F40BT ....................... 100 W

AVIC-F940BT .................... 1kW

AVIC-F840BT .................... 1kW

Equaliser (8-Band Graphic Equaliser):

Frequency .......................... 40 Hz/80 Hz/200 Hz/400 Hz/

1 kHz/2.5 kHz/8 kHz/10 kHz

Gain ...................................... ±12 dB

Loudness contour:

Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB

(10 kHz)

Engb 215

Appendix

Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB

(10 kHz)

High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB

(10 kHz)

(volume: –30 dB)

HPF:

Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/

125 Hz

Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct

Subwoofer:

Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/

125 Hz

Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct

Gain ...................................... –24/+6 dB

Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse

Bass boost:

Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB

DVD Drive

System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,

AAC, DivX system

Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, DVD-R(DL),

DVD-RW, CD-ROM, CD-DA,

CD-R/RW

Region number ........................ 2

Signal format:

Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz

Number of quantisation bits

........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear

Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,

at sampling frequency

96 kHz)

Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A net-

work)

(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A

network))

Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB

(1 kHz))

Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)

Output level:

Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W(±0.2 V)

Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)

Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)

MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer

WMA decoding format ......... Ver. 7, 8 & 9

AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded

by iTunes):

.m4a

DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,

Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :

.avi, .divx

USB

USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed

Max current supply ................. 1A

File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32

USB class .................................... Mass storage class

Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/

H.264/MPEG4/WMV

SD (AVIC-F40BT)

SD memory card, SDHC memory card

Compatible physical format

........................................... Version 2.00

File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32

Decoding format ............ MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/

H.264/MPEG4/WMV

SD (AVIC-F940BT and AVIC-F840BT)

microSD card, microSDHC card

Compatible physical format

........................................... Version 2.00

File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32

Decoding format ............ MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/

H.264/MPEG4/WMV

Bluetooth

Version .......................................... Bluetooth 2.0+EDR

Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.

(Power class 2)

FM tuner

Frequency range ...................... 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,

S/N: 30 dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 72 dB (IEC-A network)

Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,

stereo)

0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,

mono)

Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz (±3 dB)

Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)

MW tuner

Frequency range ...................... 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz (9 kHz)

Usable sensitivity ..................... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IEC-A network)

LW tuner

Frequency range ...................... 153 kHz to 281 kHz

Usable sensitivity ..................... 28 µV (S/N: 20 dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IEC-A network)

Engb

216

Appendix

RDS-TMC tuner

Rated power source ............... 13.8 V DC

(allowable voltage range:

10.0 V to 14.5 V DC)

Earthing system ....................... Negative type

Maximum current consumption

........................................... 60 mA

Dimensions (W × H × D) ... 68 mm × 49 mm × 19 mm

Weight .......................................... 180 g

Note

Specifications and design are subject to possible

modifications without notice due to im-

provements.

Engb 217

Appendix

Engb

218

Engb 219

PIONEER CORPORATION

1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi,

Kanagawa 212-0031, JAPAN

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.

TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique

TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11

<CRB3845-B> EU

To keep up to date with the latest navigational data,

you can periodically update your navigation system.

For further details, please visit our website.

Pioneer Avic F940 Bt Operation Manual

Pioneer-Avic-F40-Bt-Operation-Manual-778469 pioneer-avic-f40-bt-operation-manual-778469

Pioneer-Avic-F840-Bt-Operation-Manual-778493 pioneer-avic-f840-bt-operation-manual-778493

AVIC F940 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-F940BT_UM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page1

AVIC F40 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-F40BT_UM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page1

AVIC F840 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-F840BT_UM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page1

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation